DP83257VF [NSC]

PLAYERa+⑩ Device (FDDI Physical Layer Controller); PLAYERa + ⑩设备( FDDI的物理层控制器)
DP83257VF
型号: DP83257VF
厂家: National Semiconductor    National Semiconductor
描述:

PLAYERa+⑩ Device (FDDI Physical Layer Controller)
PLAYERa + ⑩设备( FDDI的物理层控制器)

微控制器和处理器 串行IO控制器 通信控制器 外围集成电路 信息通信管理 数据传输 时钟
文件: 总144页 (文件大小:988K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
PRELIMINARY  
October 1994  
DP83256/56-AP/57  
TM  
a
PLAYER  
Device (FDDI Physical Layer Controller)  
Y
Alternate PMD Interface (DP83256-AP/57) supports  
UTP twisted pair FDDI PMDs with no external clock re-  
covery or clock generation functions required  
No External Filter Components  
General Description  
The DP83256/56-AP/57 Enhanced Physical Layer Control-  
a
ler (PLAYER device) implements one complete Physical  
Y
Y
Layer (PHY) entity as defined by the Fiber Distributed Data  
Interface (FDDI) ANSI X3T9.5 standard.  
Connection Management (CMT) Support (LEM, TNE,  
PC React, CF React, Auto Scrubbing)  
Ð Ð  
Full on-chip configuration switch  
a
The PLAYER  
device integrates state of the art digital  
Y
Y
clock recovery and improved clock generation functions to  
enhance performance, eliminate external components and  
remove critical layout requirements.  
Low Power CMOS-BIPOLAR design using a single 5V  
supply  
Y
Y
Y
Full duplex operation with through parity  
Separate management interface (Control Bus)  
Selectable Parity on PHY-MAC Interface and Control  
Bus Interface  
FDDI Station Management (SMT) is aided by Link Error  
Monitoring support, Noise Event Timer (TNE) support, Op-  
tional Auto Scrubbing support, an integrated configuration  
switch and built-in functionality designed to remove all strin-  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Two levels of on-chip loopback  
gent response time requirements such as PC React and  
Ð
CF React.  
Ð
4B/5B encoder/decoder  
Framing logic  
Elasticity Buffer, Repeat Filter, and Smoother  
Line state detector/generator  
Features  
Y
Single chip FDDI Physical Layer (PHY) solution  
Y
Supports single attach stations, dual attach stations  
and concentrators with no external logic  
DP83256 for SAS/DAS single path stations  
DP83257 for SAS/DAS single/dual path stations  
DP83256-AP for SAS/DAS single path stations that re-  
quire the alternate PMD interface  
Integrated Digital Clock Recovery Module provides en-  
hanced tracking and greater lock acquisition range  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Integrated Clock Generation Module provides all neces-  
sary clock signals for an FDDI system from an external  
12.5 MHz reference  
TL/F/11708–1  
FIGURE 1-1. FDDI Chip Set Overview  
TRI-STATEÉ is a registered trademark of National Semiconductor Corporation.  
BMACTM, BSITM, CDDTM, CDLTM, CRDTM, CYCLONETM, MACSITM, PLAYERTM, PLAYER  
TM  
and TWISTERTM are trademarks of National Semiconductor Corporation.  
a
C
1995 National Semiconductor Corporation  
TL/F/11708  
RRD-B30M115/Printed in U. S. A.  
Table of Contents  
1.0 FDDI CHIP SET OVERVIEW  
5.21 Current State Prescale Count Register (CSPCR)  
5.22 Link Error Threshold Register (LETR)  
5.23 Current Link Error Count Register (CLECR)  
5.24 User Definable Register (UDR)  
1.1 FDDI 2-Chip Set  
1.2 FDDI TP-PMD Solutions  
2.0 ARCHITECTURE DESCRIPTION  
5.25 Device ID Register (DIR)  
2.1 Block Overview  
2.2 Interfaces  
5.26 Current Injection Count Register (CIJCR)  
5.27 Interrupt Condition Comparison Register (ICCR)  
5.28 Current Transmit State Comparison Register  
(CTSCR)  
3.0 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION  
3.1 Clock Recovery Module  
3.2 Receiver Block  
5.29 Receive Condition Comparison Register A (RCCRA)  
5.30 Receive Condition Comparision Register B (RCCRB)  
5.31 Mode Register 2 (MODE2)  
3.3 Transmitter Block  
3.4 Configuration Switch  
3.5 Clock Generation Module  
3.6 Station Management Support  
3.7 PHY-MAC Interface  
3.8 PMD Interface  
5.32 CMT Condition Comparison Register (CMTCCR)  
5.33 CMT Condition Register (CMTCR)  
5.34 CMT Condition Mask Register (CMTCMR)  
5.35 Reserved Registers 22H-23H (RR22H-RR23H)  
5.36 Scrub Timer Threshold Register (STTR)  
5.37 Scrub Timer Value Register (STVR)  
4.0 MODES OF OPERATION  
5.38 Trigger Definition Register (TDR)  
4.1 Run Mode  
5.39 Trigger Transition Configuration Register (TTCR)  
5.40 Reserved Registers 28H-3AH (RR28H-RR3AH)  
5.41 Clock Generation Module Register (CGMREG)  
5.42 Alternate PMD Register (APMDREG)  
4.2 Stop Mode  
4.3 Loopback Mode  
4.4 Device Reset  
4.5 Cascade Mode  
5.43 Gain Register (GAINREG)  
5.0 REGISTERS  
5.44 Reserved Registers 3EH-3FH (RR3EH-RR3FH)  
5.1 Mode Register (MR)  
6.0 SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS  
5.2 Configuration Register (CR)  
6.1 DP83256VF Signal Descriptions  
6.2 DP83256VF-AP Signal Descriptions  
6.3 DP83257VF Signal Descriptions  
5.3 Interrupt Condition Register (ICR)  
5.4 Interrupt Condition Mask Register (ICMR)  
5.5 Current Transmit State Register (CTSR)  
5.6 Injection Threshold Register (IJTR)  
5.7 Injection Symbol Register A (ISRA)  
5.8 Injection Symbol Register B (ISRB)  
5.9 Current Receive State Register (CRSR)  
5.10 Receive Condition Register A (RCRA)  
5.11 Receive Condition Register B (RCRB)  
5.12 Receive Condition Mask Register A (RCMRA)  
5.13 Receive Condition Mask Register B (RCMRB)  
5.14 Noise Threshold Register (NTR)  
7.0 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS  
7.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings  
7.2 Recommended Operating Conditions  
7.3 DC Electrical Characteristics  
7.4 AC Electrical Characteristics  
8.0 CONNECTION DIAGRAMS  
8.1 DP83256VF Connection Diagram/Pin Descriptions  
8.2 DP83256VF-AP Connection Diagram/Pin Descrip-  
tions  
5.15 Noise Prescale Threshold Register (NPTR)  
5.16 Current Noise Count Register (CNCR)  
5.17 Current Noise Prescale Count Register (CNPCR)  
5.18 State Threshold Register (STR)  
8.3 DP83257VF Connection Diagram/Pin Descriptions  
9.0 PACKAGE INFORMATION  
9.1 Land Patterns  
5.19 State Prescale Threshold Register (SPTR)  
5.20 Current State Count Register (CSCR)  
9.2 Mechanical Drawings  
2
1.0 FDDI Chip Set Overview  
National Semiconductor’s next generation FDDI 2-chip set  
DP83266 MACSITM Device Media  
Access Controller and System  
Interface  
The DP83266 Media Access Controller and System Inter-  
face (MACSI) implements the ANSI X3T9.5 Standard Media  
Access Control (MAC) protocol for operation in an FDDI  
token ring and provides a comprehensive System Interface.  
consists of two components as shown in Figure 1-1. The  
a
PLAYER device integrates the features of the DP83231  
CRDTM Clock Recovery Device, DP83241 CDDTM Clock  
Distribution Device, and DP83251/55 PLAYERTM Physical  
a
Layer Controller. In addition, the PLAYER device contains  
enhanced SMT support.  
The MACSI device transmits, receives, repeats, and strips  
tokens and frames. It produces and consumes optimized  
data structures for efficient data transfer. Full duplex archi-  
tecture with through parity allows diagnostic transmission  
and self testing for error isolation in point-to-point connec-  
tions.  
National Semiconductor’s FDDI TP-PMD Solutions consist  
of two componentsÐthe DP83222 CYCLONETM Twisted  
Pair FDDI Stream Cipher Device and the DP83223A  
TWISTERTM Twisted Pair FDDI Transceiver Device.  
For more information on the other devices of the chip set,  
consult the appropriate datasheets and application notes.  
The MACSI device includes the functionality of both the  
DP83261 BMAC device and the DP83265 BSI-2 device with  
additional enhancements for higher performance and reli-  
ability.  
1.1 FDDI 2-CHIP SET  
a
Device Physical Layer Controller  
DP83256/56-AP/57 PLAYER  
Features  
Y
a
The PLAYER  
device implements the Physical Layer  
Over 9 Kbytes of on-chip FIFO  
(PHY) protocol as defined by the ANSI FDDI PHY X3T9.5  
standard.  
Y
5 DMA Channels (2 Output and 3 Input)  
Y
12.5 MHz to 33 MHz operation  
Y
Features  
Y
Full duplex operation with through parity  
Y
Single chip FDDI Physical Layer (PHY) solution  
Real-time VOID frame stripping indicator for bridges  
Y
Y
Integrated Digital Clock Recovery Module provides en-  
hanced tracking and greater lock acquisition range  
On-chip Address bit swapping capability  
Y
32-bit wide Address/Data path with byte parity  
Y
Y
Integrated Clock Generation Module provides all neces-  
sary clock signals for an FDDI system from an external  
12.5 MHz reference  
Programmable transfer burst sizes of  
words  
4 or 8 32-bit  
Y
Y
Receive frame filtering services  
Y
Alternate PMD Interface (DP83256-AP/57) supports  
UTP twisted pair FDDI PMDs with no external clock re-  
covery or clock generation functions required  
Frame-per-Page mode controllable on each DMA  
channel  
Y
Y
Y
Demultiplexed Addresses supported on ABus  
New multicast address matching  
Y
No External Filter Components  
Y
Connection Management (CMT) Support (LEM, TNE,  
PC React, CF React, Auto Scrubbing)  
ANSI X3T9.5 MAC standard defined ring service op-  
tions  
Ð Ð  
Full on-chip configuration switch  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Supports all FDDI Ring Scheduling Classes (Synchro-  
nous, Asynchronous, etc.)  
Low Power CMOS-BIPOLAR design using a single 5V  
supply  
Supports Individual, Group, Short, Long, and External  
Addressing.  
Y
Y
Y
Full duplex operation with through parity  
Separate management interface (Control Bus)  
Selectable Parity on PHY-MAC Interface and Control  
Bus Interface  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Generates Beacon, Claim, and Void frames  
Extensive ring and station statistics gathering  
Extension for MAC level bridging  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Two levels of on-chip loopback  
Enhanced SBus compatibility  
4B/5B encoder/decoder  
Interfaces to DRAMs or directly to system bus  
Supports frame Header/Info splitting  
Programmable Big or Little Endian alignment  
Framing logic  
Elasticity Buffer, Repeat Filter, and Smoother  
Line state detector/generator  
Supports single attach stations, dual attach stations  
and concentrators with no external logic  
DP83256/56-AP for SAS/DAS single path stations  
P83257 for SAS/DAS single/dual path stations  
Y
Y
In addition, the DP83257 contains the additional PHY Da-  
Ð
ta.request and PHY Data.indicate ports required for con-  
Ð
centrators and dual attach, dual path stations.  
3
DP83222 CYCLONE Twisted Pair  
FDDI Stream Cipher Device  
DP83223A TWISTER High Speed  
Networking Transceiver Device  
General Description  
General Description  
The DP83222 CYCLONE Stream Cipher Scrambler/Des-  
crambler Device is an integrated circuit designed to inter-  
face directly with the serial bit streams of a Twisted Pair  
FDDI PMD. The DP83222 is designed to be fully compatible  
with the National Semiconductor FDDI Chip Sets, including  
twisted pair FDDI Transceivers, such as the DP83223A  
Twisted Pair Transceiver (TWISTER). The DP83222 re-  
quires a 125 MHz Transmit Clock and corresponding Re-  
ceive Clock for synchronous data scrambling and descram-  
bling. The DP83222 is compliant with the ANSI X3T9.5  
TP-PMD standard and is required for the reduction of EMI  
emission over unshielded media. The DP83222 is specified  
to work in conjunction with existing twisted pair transceiver  
signalling schemes and enables high bandwidth transmis-  
sion over Twisted Pair copper media.  
The DP83223A Twisted Pair Transceiver is an integrated  
circuit capable of driving and receiving either binary or  
(MLT-3) encoded datastreams. The DP83223A Transceiver  
is designed to interface directly with standards compliant  
FDDI, 100BASE-TX or STS-3c ATM chip sets, allowing low  
cost data links over copper based media. The DP83223A  
allows links of up to 100 meters over both Shielded Twisted  
Pair (STP) and datagrade Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) or  
equivalent. The electrical performance of the DP83223A  
meets or exceeds all performance parameters specified  
in the ANSI X3T9.5 TP-PMD standard, the IEEE 802.3  
100BASE-TX Fast Ethernet Specification and the ATM Fo-  
rum 155 Mbps Twisted Pair PMD Interface Specification.  
The DP83223A also provides important features such as  
baseline restoration, TRI-STATE capable transmit outputs,  
É
and controlled transmit output edge rates (to reduce EMI  
radiation) for both binary and MLT-3 modes of operation.  
Features  
Y
Enables 100 Mbps FDDI signalling over Category  
Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) cable and Type  
Shielded Twisted Pair (STP)  
5
1
Features  
Y
Compliant with ANSI X3T9.5 TP-PMD standard  
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Reduces EMI emissions over Twisted Pair media  
Compatible with ANSI X3T9.5 TP-PMD standard  
Compliant with IEEE 802.3 100BASE-TX Ethernet draft  
standard  
Y
a
Compliant with ATM Forum 155 Mbps Twisted Pair  
Specification  
Requires a single 5V supply  
Transparent mode of operation  
Flexible NRZ and NRZI format options  
Advanced BiCMOS process  
Y
Integrated baseline restoration circuit  
Y
Integrated transmitter and receiver with adaptive equali-  
zation circuit  
Signal Detect and Clock Detect inputs provided for en-  
hanced functionality  
Y
Programmable binary or MLT-3 operation  
Y
Isolated TX and RX power supplies for minimum noise  
coupling  
Y
Suitable for Fiber Optic PMD replacement applications  
Y
Controlled transmit output edge rates for reduced EMI  
Y
TRI-STATE capable current transmit outputs  
Y
Loopback feature for board diagnostics  
Y
Programmable transmit voltage amplitude  
4
2.0 Architecture Description  
2.1 BLOCK OVERVIEW  
The Receiver Block performs the following operations:  
Optionally converts the incoming data stream from NRZI  
to NRZ.  
#
a
The PLAYER  
device is comprised of six blocks: Clock  
Recovery, Receiver, Configuration Switch, Transmitter, Sta-  
tion Management (SMT) Support, and Clock Generation  
Module as shown in Figure 2-1.  
Decodes the data from 5B to 4B coding.  
#
#
Converts the serial bit stream into 10-bit bytes composed  
of 8 bits data, 1 bit parity, and 1 bit control information.  
Clock Recovery  
Compensates for the differences between the upstream  
station clock and the local clocks.  
#
The Clock Recovery Module accepts a 125 Mbps NRZI data  
stream from the external PMD receiver. It then provides the  
extracted and synchronized data and clock to the Receiver  
block.  
Decodes Line States.  
#
#
Detects link errors.  
The Clock Recovery Module performs the following opera-  
tions:  
Presents data symbol pairs (bytes) to the Configuration  
Switch Block.  
#
Locks to and tracks the incoming NRZI data stream  
#
Configuration Switch  
Extracts data stream and synchronized 125 MHz clock  
#
An FDDI station may be in one of three configurations: Iso-  
late, Wrap or Thru. The Configuration Switch supports these  
configurations by switching the transmitted and received  
a
data paths between PLAYER devices and one or more  
MACSI devices.  
Receiver  
During normal operation, the Receiver Block accepts serial  
data as inputs at the rate of 125 Mbps from the Clock Re-  
covery Module. During the Internal Loopback mode of oper-  
ation, the Receiver Block accepts data directly from the  
Transmitter Block.  
a
The configuration switch is integrated into the PLAYER  
device, therefore no external logic is required for this func-  
tion.  
Setting the Configuration switch can be done explicitly via  
the Control Bus Interface or it can be set automatically with  
the CF React SMT Support feature.  
Ð
TL/F/11708–2  
a
FIGURE 2-1. PLAYER Device Block Diagram  
5
2.0 Architecture Description (Continued)  
Transmitter  
PMD Interface  
a
device to a  
The Transmitter Block accepts 10-bit bytes composed of 8  
bits data, 1 bit parity, and 1 bit control information from the  
Configuration Switch.  
The PMD Interface connects the PLAYER  
standard FDDI Physical Media Connection such as a fiber  
optic transceiver or a copper twisted pair transceiver. It is a  
125 MHz full duplex serial connection.  
The Transmitter Block performs the following operations:  
a
The DP83256-AP and DP83257 PLAYER devices contain  
Encodes the data from 4B to 5B coding.  
#
two PMD interfaces. The Primary PMD Interface should be  
used for all PMD implementations that do not require an  
external scrambler/descrambler function, clock recovery  
function, or clock generation function, such as a Fiber Optic  
or Shielded Twisted Pair (SDDI) PMD. The second, Alter-  
nate PMD Interface can be used to support Unshielded  
Twisted Pair (UTP) PMDs that require external scrambling,  
and allows implementation with no external clock recovery  
or clock generation functions required.  
Filters out code violations from the data stream.  
#
#
Generates Idle, Master, Halt, Quiet, or other user defined  
symbol pairs upon request.  
Converts the data stream from NRZ to NRZI format for  
transmission.  
#
Provides smoothing function when necessary.  
#
During normal operation, the Transmitter Block presents se-  
rial data to the PMD transmitter. While in Internal Loopback  
mode, the Transmitter Block presents serial data to the Re-  
ceiver Block. While in the External Loopback mode, the  
Transmitter Block presents serial data to the Clock Recov-  
ery Module.  
PHY Port Interface  
a
The PHY Port Interface connects the PLAYER device to  
one or more MAC devices and/or PLAYER devices. Each  
a
PHY Port Interface consists of two byte-wide interfaces, one  
a
for PHY Request data input to the PLAYER device and  
one for the PHY Indicate data output of the PLAYER de-  
Clock Generation Module  
a
The Clock Generation Module is an integrated phase locked  
loop that generates all of the required clock signals for the  
vice. Each byte-wide interface consists of a parity bit (odd  
parity), a control bit, and two 4-bit symbols.  
a
12.5 MHz reference.  
PLAYER  
device and an FDDI system from  
a
single  
a
The DP83257 PLAYER device has two PHY Port Interfac-  
es while the DP83256 has one PHY Port Interface.  
The Clock Generation Module features:  
Control Bus Interface  
High precision clock timing generated from  
12.5 MHz reference.  
a
single  
#
a
The Control Bus Interface connects the PLAYER device  
to a wide variety of microprocessors and microcontrollers.  
The Control Bus is an asynchronous interface which pro-  
vides access to 64 8-bit registers which monitor and control  
Multiple precision phased (8 ns/16 ns) 12.5 MHz Local  
Byte Clocks to eliminate timing skew in large multi-board  
concentrator configurations.  
#
#
a
the behavior of the PLAYER device.  
LBC timing which is insensitive to loading variations over  
a wide range (20 pF to 70 pF) of LBC loads.  
The Control Bus Interface allows a user to:  
Configure SMT features.  
#
#
#
A selectable dual frequency system clock.  
#
#
Program the Configuration Switch.  
Low clock edge jitter, due to high VCO stability.  
Enable/disable functions within the Transmitter and Re-  
Station Management (SMT) Support  
ceiver Blocks (i.e., NRZ/NRZI Encoder, Smoother, PHY  
Request Data Parity, Line State Generation, Symbol pair  
Injection, NRZ/NRZI Decoder, Cascade Mode, etc.).  
The Station Management Support Block provides a number  
of useful features to simplify the implementation of the Con-  
nection Management (CMT) portion of SMT.  
The Control Bus Interface also can be used to perform the  
following functions:  
These features eliminate the time critical CMT response  
time constraints imposed by PC React and CF React  
times.  
Monitor Line States received.  
#
#
#
Ð
Ð
Monitor link errors detected by the Receiver Block.  
Integrated counters and timers eliminate the need for addi-  
tional external devices.  
Monitor other error conditions.  
Clock Interface  
The following are the CMT features supported:  
The Clock Interface is used to configure the Clock Genera-  
tion Module and to provide the required clock signals for an  
FDDI system.  
PC React  
Ð
CF React  
Ð
Auto Scrubbing (TCF Timer)  
#
#
#
The following clock signals are generated:  
Timer, Idle Detection (TID Timer)  
#
#
#
5 phase offset 12.5 MHz Local Byte Clocks  
#
#
#
25 MHz Local Symbol Clock  
Noise Event Counter (TNE Timer)  
15.625 or 31.25 MHz System Clock  
Link Error Monitor (LEM Counter)  
Miscellaneous Interface  
2.2 INTERFACES  
The Miscellaneous Interface consists of:  
a
The PLAYER device connects to other devices via five  
A reset signal.  
#
#
#
functional interfaces: PMD Interface, PHY Port Interface,  
Control Bus Interface, Clock Interface, and the Miscellane-  
ous Interface.  
User definable sense signals.  
User definable enable signals.  
a
Synchronization for cascading PLAYER  
high-performance non-FDDI mode).  
Device Power and Ground pins.  
devices (a  
#
#
6
3.0 Functional Description  
a
The PLAYER  
device is comprised of six blocks: Clock  
DIGITAL PHASE DETECTOR  
Recovery, Receiver, Transmitter, Configuration Switch,  
Clock Generation, and Station Management Support.  
The Digital Phase Detector has two main functions: phase  
error detection and data recovery.  
3.1 CLOCK RECOVERY MODULE  
Phase error detection is accomplished by a digital circuit  
that compares the input data (PMID) to an internal phase-  
locked 125 MHz reference clock and generates a pair of  
error signals. The first signal is a pulse whose width is equal  
to the phase error between the input data and a reference  
clock and the second signal is a 4 ns reference pulse.  
These signals are fed into the Digital Phase Error Processor  
block.  
The Clock Recovery Module accepts a 125 Mbps NRZI data  
stream from the external PMD receiver. It then provides the  
extracted and synchronized data and clock to the Receiver  
block.  
The Clock Recovery Module performs the following opera-  
tions:  
Locks onto and tracks the incoming NRZI data stream  
#
The data recovery function converts the incoming encoded  
data stream (PMID) into synchronized data and clock sig-  
nals. When the circuit is in lock the rising edge of the recov-  
ered clock is exactly centered in the recovered data bit cell.  
Extracts the data stream and the synchronized 125 MHz  
clock  
#
The Clock Recovery Module is implemented using an ad-  
vanced digital architecture that replaces sensitive analog  
The digital phase detector uses a common path for phase  
error detection and data recovery so as to minimize clock  
Static Alignment Error (SAE). Phase error averaging is also  
included so that phase errors generated by positive and  
negative PMID edges equally affect the clock recovery cir-  
cuit. This greatly improves the immunity to Duty Cycle Dis-  
tortion (DCD) in the data recovery circuit.  
a
blocks with digital circuitry. This allows the PLAYER de-  
vice to be manufactured to tighter tolerances since it is less  
sensitive to processing variations that can adversely affect  
analog circuits.  
The Clock Recovery Module is comprised of 5 main func-  
tional blocks:  
Digital Phase Detector  
DIGITAL PHASE ERROR PROCESSOR  
Digital Phase Error Processor  
The Digital Phase Error Processor is responsible for sam-  
pling the Phase Detector’s phase error outputs and produc-  
ing two digital outputs that indicate to the digital loop filter  
how to adjust for a difference between the data phase and  
reference phases.  
Digital Loop Filter  
Digital Phase to Frequency Converter  
Frequency Controlled Oscillator  
See Figure 3-1, Clock Recovery Module Block Diagram.  
The Phase Error Processor is designed to eliminate the ef-  
fects of different clock edge densities between data sym-  
bols and the various line state symbols on the PLL’s loop  
gain.  
TL/F/11708–3  
FIGURE 3-1. Clock Recovery Module Block Diagram  
7
3.0 Functional Description (Continued)  
Since the loop gain is held constant regardless of the in-  
coming signal edge density, PLL characteristics such as jit-  
ter, acquisition rate, locking range etc., are deterministic and  
show minimal spread under various operating environments.  
Each valid Up or Down signal causes a partial 7-bit counter  
(using only 96 counts) to increment or decrement at the  
O
–F converter’s clock rate of 15.625 MHz (250 MHz/16).  
When the Data Valid signal is not asserted, the counter  
holds count.  
The phase error processor also automatically puts the loop  
in open-loop-mode when the incoming data stream contains  
abnormal low edge rates. When the PLL is in open-loop-  
mode, no update is made to the PLL’s filter variables in the  
filter block. The PLL can then use the pretrained frequency  
and phase contents to perform data recovery. Since the  
loop is implemented digitally, these values (the frequency  
and phase variables) are retained. The resolution of the fre-  
quency variable is about 1.3 ppm of the incoming frequency.  
The resolution of the phase variable is about 40 ps.  
The counter value is used to produce 3 triangle waves that  
are offset in phase by 120 degrees. This is done with a  
special Pulse Density Modulator waveform synthesizer  
which takes the place of a traditional Digital-Analog convert-  
er. The frequency of the triangle waves tells the Frequency  
Controlled Oscillator how much to adjust oscillation. The  
phase relationships (leading or lagging) between the 3 sig-  
nals indicates the direction of change.  
The minimum frequency of the triangle waves is 0 and cor-  
responds to the case when the PLL is in perfect lock with  
the incoming signal.  
DIGITAL LOOP FILTER  
The digital loop filter emulates a 1-pole, 1-zero filter and  
uses an automatic acquisition speed control circuit to dy-  
namically adjust loop parameters.  
O
The maximum frequency that the  
–F converter can pro-  
duce determines the locking range of the PLL. In this case  
the maximum frequency of each triangle wave is 162.76  
The digital loop filter takes the phase error indicator signals  
Data Valid and Up/Down from the Phase Error processor  
and accumulates errors over a few cycles before passing on  
the Data Valid and Up/Down signals to the Phase Error to  
Frequency converter.  
O
kHz, which is produced when the  
continuous count in one direction that is valid every  
–F converter gets a  
O
–F  
converter clock cycle of 15.625 MHz (250 MHz/16). The  
triangle waves have an amplitude resolution of 48 digital  
steps, so a full rising and falling period takes 96 counts  
The filter has 4 sets of bandwidth and damping parameters  
which are switched dynamically by an acquisition control  
circuit. The input Signal Detect (SD) starts the sequence  
and, thereafter, no user programming is required to finish  
the sequence.  
which produces a maximum frequency of 162.76 kHz  
(1/(1/15.625 kHz * 96)).  
The 96 digital counts of the triangle waves also lead to a  
very fine PLL phase resolution of 42 ps (4 ns/96 counts).  
This high phase resolution is achieved using very low fre-  
quency signals, in contrast to a standard PLL which must  
operate at significantly higher frequencies than the data be-  
ing tracked to achieve such high phase resolution.  
At the completion of the locking sequence, the loop has the  
narrowest bandwidth such that the loop produces minimal  
recovered clock jitter. The PLL can track an incoming fre-  
g
quency offset of approximately 200 ppm. After the acqui-  
sition sequence, the equivalent natural frequency of the  
FREQUENCY CONTROLLED OSCILLATOR (FCO)  
g
loop is reduced to about 7 kHz ( 56 ppm) of frequency  
offset.  
The frequency controlled oscillator produces a 250 MHz  
clock that, when divided by 2, is phase locked to the incom-  
ing data’s clock.  
The automatic tracking mechanism allows the loop to quick-  
ly lock onto the initial data stream for data recovery (typical-  
ly less than 10 ms) and yet produce very little recovered  
clock jitter.  
The FCO uses three 250 MHz reference clock signals from  
the Clock Generation Module and three 0 Hz to 162.76 kHz  
error clock signals from the Phase Error to Frequency Con-  
verter as inputs. Each signal in a triplet is 120 degrees  
phase shifted from the next.  
PHASE ERROR TO FREQUENCY CONVERTER (OF)  
The Phase Error to Frequency Converter takes the Data  
Valid and Up/Down signals modified by the Digital Loop  
Filter and converts them to triangle waves. The frequency of  
the triangle waves is then used to control the Frequency  
Controlled Oscillator’s (FCO) 250 MHz oscillations.  
Each corresponding pair (one 250 MHz and one error sig-  
nal) of signals is mixed together using an amplitude switch-  
ing modulator, with the error signal modulating the refer-  
ence. All of the outputs are then summed together to pro-  
a
where f is the error frequency.  
duce the final 250 MHz  
f
m
phase locked clock signal,  
m
8
3.0 Functional Description (Continued)  
3.2 RECEIVER BLOCK  
NRZI TO NRZ DECODER  
During normal operation, the Receiver Block accepts serial  
data input at the rate of 125 Mbps from the Clock Recovery  
Module. During the Internal Loopback mode of operation,  
the Receiver Block accepts input data from the Transmitter  
Block.  
The NRZI to NRZ Decoder converts Non-Return-To-Zero-  
Invert-On-Ones data to Non-Return-To-Zero format.  
NRZ format data is the natural data format that the receiver  
block utilizes internally, so this function is required when the  
standard NRZI format data is fed into the device. The re-  
ceiver block can bypass this conversion function in the case  
where an alternate data source outputs NRZ format data.  
The Receiver Block performs the following operations:  
Optionally converts the incoming data stream from NRZI  
to NRZ.  
#
This function can be enabled and disabled through bit 7  
(RNRZ) of the Mode Register (MR). When the bit is cleared,  
it converts the incoming bit stream from NRZI to NRZ. This  
is the normal configuration required. When the bit is set, the  
incoming NRZ bit stream is passed unchanged.  
Decodes the data from 5B to 4B coding.  
#
Converts the serial bit stream into the National byte-wide  
code.  
#
Compensates for the differences between the upstream  
station clock and the local clock.  
#
SHIFT REGISTER  
The Shift Register converts the serial bit stream into sym-  
bol-wide data for the 5B/4B Decoder.  
Decodes Line States.  
#
#
#
Detects link errors.  
The Shift Register also provides byte-wide data for the  
Framing Logic.  
Presents data symbol pairs to the Configuration Switch  
Block.  
FRAMING LOGIC  
The Receiver Block consists of the following functional  
blocks:  
The Framing Logic performs the Framing function by detect-  
ing the beginning of a frame or the Halt-Halt or Halt-Quiet  
symbol pair.  
NRZI to NRZ Decoder  
Shift Register  
The J-K symbol pair (11000 10001) indicates the beginning  
of a frame during normal operation. The Halt-Halt (00100  
00100) and Halt-Quiet (00100 00000) symbol pairs are de-  
tected for Connection Management (CMT).  
Framing Logic  
Symbol Decoder  
Line State Detector  
Elasticity Buffer  
Link Error Detector  
See Figure 3-2.  
TL/F/11708–4  
FIGURE 3-2. Receiver Block Diagram  
9
3.0 Functional Description (Continued)  
Framing may be temporarily suspended (i.e. framing hold),  
in order to maintain data integrity.  
TABLE 3-1. 5B/4B Symbol Decoding  
Symbol  
Incoming 5B  
Decoded 4B  
Detecting JK  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
11110  
01001  
10100  
10101  
01010  
01011  
01110  
01111  
10010  
10011  
10110  
10111  
11010  
11011  
11100  
11101  
0000  
0001  
0010  
0011  
0100  
0101  
0110  
0111  
1000  
1001  
1010  
1011  
1100  
1101  
1110  
1111  
The JK symbol pair can be used to detect the beginning of a  
frame during Active Line State (ALS) and Idle Line State  
(ILS) conditions.  
While the Line State Detector indicates Idle Line State the  
receiver ‘‘reframes’’ upon detecting a JK symbol pair and  
enters the Active Line State.  
During Active Line State, acceptance of a JK symbol (re-  
framing) is allowed for any on-boundary JK which is detect-  
ed at least 1.5 byte times after the previous JK.  
During Active Line State, once reframed on a JK, a subse-  
quent off-boundary JK is ignored, even if it is detected be-  
yond 1.5 byte times after the previous JK.  
During Active Line State, an Idle or Ending Delimiter (T)  
symbol will allow reframing on any subsequent JK, if a JK is  
detected at least 1.5 byte times after the previous JK.  
Detecting HALT-HALT AND HALT-QUIET  
I (Idle)  
11111  
1010  
0001  
1101  
During Idle Line State, the detection of a Halt-Halt, or Halt-  
Quiet symbol pair will still allow the reframing of any subse-  
quent on-boundary JK.  
H (Halt)  
00100  
JK (Starting  
11000 and  
10001  
Delimiter)  
Once a JK is detected during Active Line State, off-bounda-  
ry Halt-Halt, or Halt-Quiet symbol pairs are ignored until the  
Elasticity Buffer (EB) has an opportunity to recenter. They  
are treated as violations.  
T (Ending  
01101  
0101  
Delimiter)  
R (Reset)  
00111  
11001  
00000  
00001  
00010  
00011  
00101  
00110  
01000  
01100  
10000  
0110  
0111  
0010  
0010  
0010  
0010  
0010  
0010  
0010  
0010  
0010  
After recentering on a Halt-Halt, or Halt-Quiet symbol pair,  
all off boundary Halt-Halt or Halt-Quiet symbol pairs are ig-  
nored until the EB has a chance to recenter during a line  
state other than Active Line State (which may be as long as  
2.8 byte times).  
S (Set)  
Q (Quiet)  
V (Violation)  
V
V
V
V
V
V
V
SYMBOL DECODER  
The Symbol Decoder is a two level system. The first level is  
a 5-bit to 4-bit converter, and the second level is a 4-bit  
symbol pair to byte-wide code converter.  
The first level latches the received 5-bit symbols and de-  
codes them into 4-bit symbols. Symbols are decoded into  
two types: data and control. The 4-bit symbols are sent to  
the Line State Detector and the second level of the Symbol  
Decoder. See Table 3-1 for the 5B/4B Symbol Decoding  
list.  
Note: V denotes PHY Invalid or an Elasticity Buffer stuff byte  
Ê
denotes Idle symbol in ILS or an Elasticity Buffer stuff byte  
I
Ê
LINE STATES DESCRIPTION  
Active Line State  
The second level translates two symbols from the 5B/4B  
converter and the line state information from the Line State  
Detector into the National byte-wide code.  
The Line State Detector recognizes the incoming data to be  
in the Active Line State upon the reception of the Starting  
Delimiter (JK symbol pair).  
The Line State Detector continues to indicate Active Line  
State while receiving data symbols, Ending Delimiter (T  
symbols), and Frame Status symbols (R and S) after the JK  
symbol pair.  
LINE STATE DETECTOR  
The ANSI X3T9.5 FDDI Physical Layer (PHY) standard  
specifies eight Line States that the Physical Layer can  
transmit. These Line States are used in the Connection  
Management process. They are also used to indicate data  
within a frame during normal operation.  
Idle Line State  
The Line State Detector recognizes the incoming data to be  
in the Idle Line State upon the reception of 2 Idle symbol  
pairs nominally (plus up to 9 bits of 1 in start up cases).  
The Line States are reported through the Current Receive  
A
State Register (CRSR), Receive Condition Register  
(RCRA), and Receive Condition Register B (RCRB).  
Idle Line State indicates the preamble of a frame or the lack  
of frame transmission during normal operation. Idle Line  
State is also used in the handshake sequence of the PHY  
Connection Management process.  
10  
3.0 Functional Description (Continued)  
Super Idle Line State  
The Elasticity Buffer will support a maximum clock skew of  
50 ppm with a maximum packet length of 4500 bytes.  
The Line State Detector recognizes the incoming data to be  
in the Super Idle Line State upon the reception of 8 consec-  
utive Idle symbol pairs nominally (plus 1 symbol pair).  
To make up for the accumulation of frequency disparity be-  
tween the two clocks, the Elasticity Buffer will insert or de-  
lete Idle symbol pairs in the preamble. Data is written into  
the byte-wide registers of the Elasticity Buffer with the Re-  
ceive Clock, while data is read from the registers with the  
Local Byte Clock.  
The Super Idle Line State is used to insure synchronization  
of PCM signalling.  
No Signal Detect  
The Line State Detector recognizes the incoming data to be  
in the No Signal Detect state upon the deassertion of the  
Signal Detect signal or lack of internal clock detect from the  
Clock Recovery Module, and reception of 8 Quiet symbol  
pairs nominally. No Signal Detect indicates that the incom-  
ing link is inactive. This is the same as receiving Quiet Line  
State (QLS).  
The Elasticity Buffer will recenter (i.e. set the read and write  
pointers to a predetermined distance from each other) upon  
the detection of a JK or every four byte times during PHY  
Invalid (i.e. MLS, HLS, QLS, NLS, NSD) and Idle Line State.  
The Elasticity Buffer is designed such that a given register  
cannot be written and read simultaneously under normal op-  
erating conditions. To avoid metastability problems, the EB  
overflow event is flagged and the data is tagged before the  
over/under run actually occurs.  
Master Line State  
The Line State Detector recognizes the incoming data to be  
in the Master Line State upon the reception of eight consec-  
utive Halt-Quiet symbol pairs nominally (plus up to 2 symbol  
pairs in start up cases).  
LINK ERROR DETECTOR  
The Link Error Detector provides continuous monitoring of  
an active link (i.e. during Active and Idle Line States) to  
insure that it does not exceed the maximum Bit Error Rate  
requirement as set by the ANSI standard for a station to  
remain on the ring.  
The Master Line State is used in the handshaking sequence  
of the PHY Connection Management process.  
Halt Line State  
The Line State Detector recognizes the incoming data to be  
in the Halt Line State upon the reception of eight consecu-  
tive Halt symbol pairs nominally (plus up to 2 symbol pairs in  
start up cases).  
Upon detecting a link error, the internal 8-bit Link Error Mon-  
itor Counter is decremented. The start value for the Link  
Error Monitor Counter is programmed through the Link Error  
Threshold Register (LETR). When the Link Error Monitor  
Counter reaches zero, bit 4 (LEMT) of the Interrupt Condi-  
tion Register (ICR) is set to 1. The current value of the Link  
Error Monitor Counter can be read through the Current Link  
Error Count Register (CLECR). For higher error rates the  
current value is an approximate count because the counter  
rolls over.  
The Halt Line State is used in the handshaking sequence of  
the PHY Connection Management process.  
Quiet Line State  
The Line State Detector recognizes the incoming data to be  
in the Quiet Line State upon the reception of eight consecu-  
tive Quiet symbol pairs nominally (plus up to 9 bits of 0 in  
start up cases).  
There are two ways to monitor Link Error Rate: polling and  
interrupt.  
The Quiet Line State is used in the handshaking sequence  
of the PHY Connection Management process.  
Polling  
The Link Error Monitor Counter can be set to a large value,  
like FF. This will allow for the greatest time between polling  
the register. This start value is programmed through the Link  
Error Threshold Register (LETR).  
Noise Line State  
The Line State Detector recognizes the incoming data to be  
in the Noise Line State upon the reception of 16 noise sym-  
bol pairs without entering any known line state.  
Upon detecting a link error, the Line Error Monitor Counter  
is decremented.  
The Noise Line State indicates that data is not being re-  
ceived correctly.  
The Host System reads the current value of the Link Error  
Monitor Counter via the Current Link Error Count Register  
(CLECR). The Counter is then reset to FF.  
Line State Unknown  
The Line State Detector recognizes the incoming data to be  
in the Line State Unknown state upon the reception of 1  
inconsistent symbol pair (i.e. data that is not expected). This  
may signify the beginning of a new line state.  
Interrupt  
The Link Error Monitor Counter can be set to a small value,  
like 5 to 10. This start value is programmed through the Link  
Error Threshold Register (LETR).  
Line State Unknown indicates that data is not being re-  
ceived correctly. If the condition persists the Noise Line  
State (NLS) may be entered.  
Upon detecting a link error, the Line Error Monitor Counter  
is decremented. When the counter reaches zero, bit 4  
(LEMT) of the Interrupt Condition Register (ICR) is set to 1,  
and the interrupt signal goes low, interrupting the Host Sys-  
tem.  
ELASTICITY BUFFER  
The Elasticity Buffer performs the function of a ‘‘variable  
depth’’ FIFO to compensate for phase and frequency clock  
skews between the Receive Clock (RXCg) and the Local  
Byte Clock (LBC).  
Miscellaneous Items  
When bit 0 (RUN) of the Mode Register (MR) is set to zero,  
Bit 5 (EBOU) of the Receive Condition Register B (RCRB) is  
set to 1 to indicate an error condition when the Elasticity  
Buffer cannot compensate for the clock skew.  
a
or when the PLAYER device is reset through the Reset  
pin ( RST), the internal signal detect line is internally  
E
forced to zero and the Line State Detector is set to Line  
State Unknown and No Signal Detect.  
11  
3.0 Functional Description (Continued)  
While in Internal Loopback mode, the Transmitter Block  
presents serial data to the Receiver Block. While in the Ex-  
ternal Loopback mode, the Transmitter Block presents seri-  
al data to the Clock Recovery Module.  
3.3 TRANSMITTER BLOCK  
The Transmitter Block accepts 10-bit bytes consisting of  
8 bits data, 1 bit parity, and 1 bit control information, from  
the Configuration Switch.  
The Transmitter Block consists of the following functional  
blocks:  
The Transmitter Block performs the following operations:  
Encodes the data from 4B to 5B coding.  
#
#
Data Registers  
Parity Checker  
Filters out code violations from the data stream.  
Is capable of generating Idle, Master, Halt, Quiet, or oth-  
er user defined symbol pairs.  
4B/5B Encoder  
Repeat Filter  
Smoother  
Line State Generator  
Injection Control Logic  
Shift Register  
#
Converts the data stream from NRZ to NRZI for trans-  
mission.  
#
Serializes data.  
#
During normal operation, the Transmitter Block presents se-  
rial data to a PMD transmitter.  
NRZ to NRZI Encoder  
See Figure 3-3, Transmitter Block Diagram.  
TL/F/11708–5  
FIGURE 3-3. Transmitter Block Diagram  
12  
3.0 Functional Description (Continued)  
TABLE 3-2. 4B/5B Symbol Encoding  
DATA REGISTERS  
Symbol  
4B Code  
5B Code  
Data from the Configuration Switch is stored in the Data  
Registers. The 10-bit byte-wide data consists of a parity bit,  
a control bit, and two 4-bit data symbols as shown below.  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
0000  
0001  
0010  
0011  
0100  
0101  
0110  
0111  
1000  
1001  
1010  
1011  
1100  
1101  
1110  
1111  
11110  
01001  
10100  
10101  
01010  
01011  
01110  
01111  
10010  
10011  
10110  
10111  
11010  
11011  
11100  
11101  
b9  
Parity Bit Control Bit  
FIGURE 3-4. Byte-Wide Data  
b8  
b7  
b0  
Data Bits  
The parity is odd parity. The control bit determines whether  
the Data bits represent Data or Control information. When  
the control bit is 0 the Data field is interpreted as data and  
when it is 1 the field is interpreted as control information  
according to the National Semiconductor control codes.  
PARITY CHECKER  
The Parity Checker verifies that the parity bit in the Data  
Register represents odd parity (i.e. odd number of 1s).  
The parity is enabled and disabled through bit 6 (PRDPE) of  
the Current Transmit State Register (CTSR).  
N
0000  
1101  
11110 or  
11111  
If a parity error occurs, the Parity Checker will set bit 0 (DPE)  
in the Interrupt Condition Register (ICR) and report the error  
to the Repeat Filter.  
JK (Starting  
Delimiter)  
T (Ending  
Delimiter)  
R (Reset)  
11000 and  
10001  
4B/5B ENCODER  
0100 or  
0101  
01101  
The 4B/5B Encoder converts the two 4-bit data symbols  
from the Configuration Switch into their respective 5-bit  
codes.  
0110  
00111  
Note: The upper group of symbols are sent with the Control/Data pin set to  
Data, while the bottom grouping of symbols are sent with the Control/Data  
pin set to Control.  
See Table 3-2 for the Symbol Encoding list.  
REPEAT FILTER  
The Repeat Filter is used to prevent the propagation of  
code violations to the downstream station.  
Upon receiving violations in data frames, the Repeat Filter  
replaces them with two Halt symbol pairs followed by Idle  
symbols. Thus the code violations are isolated and recov-  
ered at each link and will not be propagated throughout the  
entire ring.  
13  
3.0 Functional Description (Continued)  
TL/F/11708–6  
FIGURE 3-5. Repeat Filter State Diagram  
Note: Inputs to the Repeat Filter state machine are shown above the transition lines, while outputs from the state machine are shown below the transition lines.  
Note: Abbreviations used in the Repeat Filter State Diagram are shown in Table 3-3.  
14  
3.0 Functional Description (Continued)  
1. In Repeat State, violations cause transitions to Halt State  
and two Halt symbol pairs are transmitted (unless JK or Ix  
occurs) followed by transition to Idle State.  
TABLE 3-3. Abbreviations used in the  
Repeat Filter State Diagram  
2. When Ix is encountered, the Repeat Filter goes to the Idle  
State, during which Idle symbol pairs are transmitted until  
a JK is encountered.  
F
IDLE:  
Force Idle true when not in Active  
Ð
Transmit Mode.  
Ð
W:  
Represents the symbols R, or S, or T  
3. The Repeat Filter goes to the Repeat State following a JK  
from any state.  
E
TPARITY: Parity error  
Data symbols (for C  
interface)  
e
nn :  
0 in the PHY-MAC  
The END State, which is not part of the FDDI PHY standard,  
allows an R or S prior to a T within a frame to be recognized  
as a violation. It also allows NT to end a frame as opposed  
to being treated as a violation.  
N:  
X:  
Data portion of a control and data symbol  
mixture  
Any symbol (i.e. don’t care)  
SMOOTHER  
V :  
Ê
Violation symbols or symbols inserted by  
the Receiver Block  
The Smoother is used to keep the preamble length of a  
frame to a minimum of 6 Idle symbol pairs.  
I :  
Idle symbols or symbols inserted by the  
Receiver Block  
Ê
Idle symbols in the preamble of a frame may have been  
added or deleted by each station to compensate for the  
difference between the Receive Clock and its Local Clock.  
The preamble needs to be maintained at a minimum length  
to allow stations enough time to complete processing of one  
frame and prepare to receive another. Without the Smooth-  
er function, the minimum preamble length (6 Idle symbol  
pairs) cannot be maintained as several stations may con-  
secutively delete Idle symbols.  
ALSZILSZ:  
Active Line State or Idle Line State (i.e.  
PHY Invalid)  
E
ALSZILSZ: Not in Active Line State nor in Idle Line  
State (i.e. PHY Valid)  
H:  
R:  
S:  
T:  
Halt Symbol  
Reset Symbol  
Set Symbol  
The Smoother attempts to keep the number of Idle symbol  
pairs in the preamble at 7 by:  
Frame ending delimiter  
JK:  
I:  
Frame start delimiter  
Idle symbol (Preamble)  
Code violations  
Deleting an Idle symbol pair in preambles which have  
more than 7 Idle symbol pairs  
#
and/or  
V:  
Inserting an idle symbol pair in preambles which have  
less than 7 idle symbol pairs (i.e. Extend State).  
#
The Repeat Filter complies with the FDDI standard by ob-  
serving the following (see Figure 3-5 ):  
The Smoother Counter starts counting upon detecting an  
Idle symbol pair. It stops counting upon detecting a JK sym-  
bol pair.  
Figure 3-6 describes the Smoother state diagram.  
15  
3.0 Functional Description (Continued)  
TABLE 3-4. Transmit Modes  
LINE STATE GENERATOR  
The Line State Generator allows the transmission of the  
PHY Request data and can also generate and transmit Idle,  
Master, Halt, or Quiet symbol pairs which can be used to  
implement the Connection Management procedures as  
specified in the FDDI Station Management (SMT) standard  
document.  
Transit Mode  
Behavior  
Active Transmit Mode  
Transmit data that comes  
from Configuration Switch  
Off Transmit Mode  
Transmit Quiet symbol  
pairs and disable the PMD  
Transmitter  
The Line State Generator is programmed through Transmit  
l
k
bits 0 to 2 (TM 2:0 ) of the Current Transmit State Regis-  
ter (CTSR).  
Idle Transmit Mode  
Transmit Idle symbol pairs  
Master Transmit Mode  
Transmit Halt-Quiet  
symbol pairs  
Based on the setting of these bits, the Transmitter Block  
operates in a Transmit Mode where the Line State Genera-  
tor overwrites the Repeat Filter and Smoother outputs.  
Quiet Transmit Mode  
Transmit Quiet symbol  
pairs  
See INJECTION CONTROL LOGIC section for a listing of  
the injection Transmit Modes.  
Reserved Transmit Mode  
Reserved for future use. If  
Mode selected, Quiet  
symbol pairs will be  
transmitted.  
Table 3-4 describes the Transmit Modes.  
Halt Transmit Mode  
Transmit Halt Symbol  
pairs  
Notes:  
TL/F/11708–7  
SE: Smoother Enable  
C: Preamble Counter  
F
IDLE: Force Idle (Stop or ATM)  
Ð
Ð
X : Current Byte  
n
X
n–1  
: Previous Byte  
W: RST  
FIGURE 3-6. Smoother State Diagram  
16  
3.0 Functional Description (Continued)  
In the One Shot mode, ISRA and ISRB are injected once on  
the nth byte after a JK, where n is the programmed value  
specified in the Injection Threshold Register.  
INJECTION CONTROL LOGIC  
The Injection Control Logic replaces the data stream with a  
programmable symbol pair. This function is used to transmit  
data other than the normal data frame or Line States. The  
injection modes can be used for station diagnostic software.  
In the Periodic mode, ISRA and ISRB are injected every nth  
symbol.  
In the Continuous mode, all data symbols are replaced with  
the content of ISRA and ISRB. This is the same as periodic  
e
mode with IJTR 0.  
The Injection Symbols overwrite the Line State Generator  
(Transmit Modes) and the Repeat Filter and Smoother out-  
puts.  
These programmable symbol pairs are stored in the Injec-  
tion Symbol Register A (ISRA) and Injection Symbol Regis-  
ter B (ISRB). The Injection Threshold Register (IJTR) deter-  
mines where the Injection Symbol pair will replace the data  
symbols.  
SHIFT REGISTER  
The Shift Register converts encoded parallel data to serial  
data. The parallel data is clocked into the Shift Register by  
the Local Byte Clock (LBC1), and clocked out by the Trans-  
g
mit Bit Clock (TXC ) (externally available on the DP83257.)  
The Injection Control Logic is programmed through the bits  
NRZ TO NRZI ENCODER  
k
l
0 and 1 (IC 1:0 ) of the Current Transmit State Register  
(CTSR) to one of the following Injection Modes (see Figure  
3-7 ):  
The NRZ to NRZI Encoder converts the serial Non-Return-  
To-Zero data to Non-Return-To-Zero-Invert-On-One format.  
This function can be enabled and disabled through bit 6  
(TNRZ) of the Mode Register (MR). When programmed to  
‘‘0’’, it converts the bit stream from NRZ to NRZI. When  
programmed to ‘‘1’’, the bit stream is transmitted NRZ.  
1. No Injection (i.e. normal operation)  
2. One Shot  
3. Periodic  
4. Continuous  
In the No Injection mode, the data stream is transmitted  
unchanged.  
One Shot (Notes 1,3)  
TL/F/11708–8  
Periodic (Notes 2,3)  
TL/F/11708–9  
Continuous (Note 3)  
TL/F/1170810  
e
Note 1: In one shot, when n 0, the JK is replaced  
e
Note 2: In periodic, when n 0, all symbols are replaced.  
e
Note 3: Max value on n 255.  
FIGURE 3-7. Injection Modes  
17  
3.0 Functional Description (Continued)  
respective data path. The first two are PHY Port interface  
output data paths, A Indicate and B Indicate, that can  
drive output data paths of the external PHY Port interface.  
The third output data path is connected internally to the  
Transmit Block.  
3.4 CONFIGURATION SWITCH  
Ð
Ð
The Configuration Switch consists of a set of multiplexers  
a
and latches which allow the PLAYER device to configure  
the data paths without any external logic. The Configuration  
Switch is controlled through the Configuration Register  
(CR).  
The Configuration Switch is the same on the DP83256 de-  
vice, the DP83256-AP device, and the DP83257 device.  
However, the DP83257 has two PHY Port interfaces con-  
nected to the Configuration Switch, whereas the DP83256  
and DP83256-AP have one set of PHY port interfaces. The  
DP83257 uses the A Request and A Indicate paths as  
The Configuration Switch has four internal buses: the  
Request bus, the B Request bus, the Receive bus, and  
A
the PHY Invalid bus. The two Request buses can be driv-  
Ð
Ð
Ð
en by external input data connected to the external PHY  
Port interface. The Receive bus is internally connected to  
Ð
Ð
one PHY Port interface and the B Request and B Indi-  
Ð
Ð
a
PHY Invalid bus has a fixed 10-bit SMT PHY Invalid con-  
the Receive Block of the PLAYER  
device, while the  
cate paths as the other PHY Port interface (SeeFigure 3-8 ).  
The DP83256 and DP83256-AP, having one port interface,  
use the B Request and A Indicate paths as its external  
Ð
nection (LSU) pattern (1 0011 1010), which is useful during  
the connection process.  
Ð
Ð
port. The A Request and B Indicate paths of the  
Ð Ð  
DP83256 and DP83256-AP are null connections and are not  
used by the device (See Figure 3-9 ).  
The configuration switch also has three internal multiplex-  
ers, each can select any of the four buses to connect to its  
TL/F/1170812  
FIGURE 3-9. Configuration Switch  
Block Diagram for DP83256  
TL/F/1170811  
FIGURE 3-8. Configuration Switch  
Block Diagram for DP83257  
and DP83256-AP  
18  
3.0 Functional Description (Continued)  
Dual Attach Station(DAS)  
STATION CONFIGURATIONS  
Single Attach Station (SAS)  
A Dual Attach Station can be connected directly to the dual  
ring, or, optionally to a concentrator. There are two types of  
Dual Attach Stations: DAS with a single MAC and DAS with  
two MAC layers. See Figure 3-12 and Figure 3-13.  
The Single Attach Station can be connected to either the  
Primary or Secondary ring via a Concentrator. Only 1 MAC  
is needed in a SAS.  
Two DP83256 or DP83256-AP parts can be connected to-  
gether to build a Dual Attach Station, however this configu-  
ration does not support the optional Thru B configuration.  
When the optional Thru B configuration is desired, it is rec-  
Ð
ommended that the DP83257 be used.  
The DP83256, DP83256-AP, and DP83257 can be used in a  
Single Attach Station. The DP83256 and DP83256-AP can  
be connected to the MAC via its only PHY Port interface.  
The DP83257 can be connected to the MAC via either one  
of its 2 PHY Port Interfaces.  
Ð
A DAS with a single MAC and two paths can be configured  
as follows (see Figure 3-12 ):  
See Figure 3-10 and Figure 3-11.  
B Indicate data of PHY A is connected to A Request  
Ð
input of PHY B. B Request input of PHY A is con-  
#
Ð Ð  
nected to A Indicate output of PHY B.  
Ð
Ð
The MAC can be connected to either the A Request in-  
#
put and the A Indicate output of PHY A or the B Re-  
Ð
quest input and the B Indicate output of PHY B.  
Ð
A DAS with a single MAC and one path using the DP83256  
or DP83256-AP can be configured as follows (see Figure 3-  
13 ):  
B
output of PHY B.  
Request input of PHY A is connected to A Indicate  
Ð
#
Ð
Ð
The MAC is connected to the  
B Request input of  
#
PHY B and the A Indicate output of PHY A.  
Ð
Ð
Ð
TL/F/1170813  
FIGURE 3-10. Single Attach Station  
Using the DP83256 or DP83256-AP  
A DAS with dual MACs can be configured as follows (see  
Figure 3-14 ):  
B Indicate data of PHY A is connected to A Request  
Ð
input of PHY B. B Request input of PHY A is con-  
#
Ð Ð  
nected to A Indicate output of PHY B.  
Ð
Ð
MAC 1 is connected to the B Indicate output and the  
#
#
Ð
Ð
B
Request Input of PHY B.  
Ð
MAC 2 is connected to the A Indicate output and the  
Ð
Ð
Ð
A
Request Input of PHY A.  
Ð
Ð
TL/F/1170814  
FIGURE 3-11. Single Attachment Station (SAS)  
Using the DP83257  
19  
3.0 Functional Description (Continued)  
TL/F/1170815  
FIGURE 3-12. Dual Attachment Station (DAS), Single MAC (DP83257)  
TL/F/1170816  
FIGURE 3-13. Dual Attachment Station (DAS), Single MAC (DP83256/56-AP)  
TL/F/1170817  
FIGURE 3-14. Dual Attachment Station (DAS), Dual MACs  
20  
3.0 Functional Description (Continued)  
This may require external multiplexers, if used in conjunc-  
tion with two other MAC layers.  
CONCENTRATOR CONFIGURATIONS  
There are 2 types of concentrators: Single Attach and Dual  
Attach. These concentrators can be designed with or with-  
out MAC(s). The configuration is determined based upon its  
type and the number of active MACs in the concentrator.  
Single Attach Concentrator  
A Single Attach concentrator is a concentrator that has only  
one PHY at the dual ring connect side. It cannot, therefore,  
be connected directly to the dual ring. A Single Attach con-  
centrator is a branch to the dual ring tree. It is connected to  
the ring as a slave of another concentrator.  
a
Using the PLAYER  
device, a concentrator can be built  
with many different configurations without any external log-  
ic.  
Multiple Single Attach concentrators can be connected to-  
gether hierarchically to build a multiple levels of branches in  
a dual ring.  
The DP83256, DP83256-AP, and DP83257 can be used to  
build a Single Attach concentrator.  
See Application Note AN-675, Designing FDDI concentra-  
tors and Application Note AN-741, Differentiating FDDI con-  
centrators for further information.  
The Single Attach concentrator can be connected to either  
the primary or secondary ring depending on the connection  
with its concentrator (the concentrator that it is connected  
to as a slave).  
Concepts  
A concentrator is comprised of 2 parts: the Dual Ring Con-  
nect portion and the Master Ports.  
Figure 3-15 shows a Single Attach concentrator with a sin-  
gle MAC.  
The Dual Ring Connection portion connects the concentra-  
tor to the dual ring directly or to another concentrator. If the  
concentrator is connected directly to the dual ring, it is a  
part of the ‘‘Dual Ring of Trees’’. If the concentrator is con-  
nected to another concentrator, it is a ‘‘Branch’’ of the  
‘‘Dual Ring of Trees’’.  
Dual Attach Concentrator  
A Dual Attach concentrator is a concentrator that has two  
PHYs on the dual ring connect side. It is connected directly  
to the dual ring and is a part of the dual ring tree.  
The Dual Attach concentrator is connected to both the pri-  
mary and secondary rings.  
The Master Ports connect the concentrator to its ‘‘Slaves’’,  
or S-class, Single Attach connections. A slave could be a  
Single Attach Station or another concentrator (thus forming  
another Branch of the Dual Ring Tree).  
Dual Attach Concentrator with Single MAC  
Figure 3-16 shows a Dual Attach concentrator with a single  
MAC.  
When a MAC in a concentrator is connected to the primary  
or secondary ring, it is required to be situated at the exit port  
of that ring (i.e. its PH IND is connected to the IND Inter-  
face of the last Master Port in the concentrator (PHY M n)  
Ð
that is connected to that ring).  
Because the concentrator has one MAC, it can only transmit  
and receive frames on the ring to which the MAC is con-  
nected. The concentrator can only repeat frames on the  
other ring.  
Ð
Dual Attach Concentrator with Dual MACs  
A concentrator can have two MACs, one connected to the  
primary ring and one to the secondary ring. In addition, rov-  
ing MACs can be included in the concentrator configuration.  
A roving MAC can be used to test the stations connected to  
the concentrator before allowing them to join the dual ring.  
Figure 3-17 shows a Dual Attach concentrator with dual  
MACs.  
Because the concentrator has two MACs, it can transmit  
and receive frames on both the primary and secondary  
rings.  
21  
3.0 Functional Description (Continued)  
TL/F/1170818  
TL/F/1170819  
TL/F/1170820  
FIGURE 3-15. Single Attach Concentrator (SAC), Single MAC  
FIGURE 3-16. Dual Attach Concentrator (DAC), Single MAC  
FIGURE 3-17. Dual Attach Concentrator (DAC), Dual MACs  
22  
3.0 Functional Description (Continued)  
Another reference clock source option is a local 12.5 MHz  
crystal circuit. An example crystal circuit with component  
values is shown in Figure 3-19. This circuit is designed to  
3.5 CLOCK GENERATION MODULE  
The Clock Generation Module is an integrated phase locked  
loop that generates all of the required clock signals for the  
a
PLAYER device and the rest of an FDDI system from a  
single 12.5 MHz reference.  
operate with a crystal that has a C of 15 pF. The capacitor  
L
values may need to be slightly adjusted for an individual  
application to accomodate differences in parasitic loading.  
The Clock Generation Module features:  
The REF SEL signal selects between the two references.  
Ð
High precision clock timing generated from  
12.5 MHz reference.  
a single  
#
Multiple precision phased (8 ns/16 ns) 12.5 MHz Local  
Byte Clocks to eliminate timing skew in large multi-board  
concentrator configurations.  
#
Component Values  
Crystal: 12.50000 MHz  
R:  
270X 5%  
C
C
C
:
56 pF (1%)  
54 pF (1%)  
54 pF (1%)  
ISO  
:
LBC timing which is insensitive to loading variations over  
a wide range (20 pF to 70 pF) of LBC loads.  
#
IN  
OUT  
:
A selectable dual frequency system clock.  
#
#
Low clock edge jitter, due to high VCO stability.  
The Clock Generation Module is comprised of 6 main func-  
tional blocks:  
TL/F/1170822  
FIGURE 3-19. Crystal Circuit  
PHASE COMPARATOR  
Reference Selector  
Phase Comparator  
Loop Filter  
250 MHz Voltage Controlled Oscillator  
Output Phasing and Divide by 10  
The Phase Comparator uses two signal inputs: the selected  
12.5 MHz reference from the Reference Select Block and a  
Local Byte Clock that has been selected for the feedback  
input, FBK IN. Typically, LBC1 is used as the feedback  
Ð
clock.  
See Figure 3-18, Clock Generation Module Block Diagram.  
REFERENCE SELECTOR  
The Phase Comparator generates a pulse of current that is  
proportional to the phase difference between the two sig-  
nals. The current pulses are used to charge and discharge a  
control voltage on the internal Loop Filter. This control volt-  
age is used to minimize the phase difference between the  
two signals.  
The Reference Selector block allows the user to choose  
between 2 sources for the Clock Generation Module’s  
12.5 MHz reference clock.  
The simplest reference clock source option is to use an  
external 12.5 MHz reference signal fed into the REF IN  
Ð
input. This input can come from a crystal oscillator module  
a
or from a Local Byte Clock generated by another PLAYER  
LOOP FILTER  
device. Using the appropriate crystal oscillator ensures cor-  
rect operating frequency without having to adjust any dis-  
crete components.  
The Loop Filter is a simple internal filter made up of one  
capacitor in parallel with a serial capacitor and resistor com-  
bination. One end of the filter is connected to Ground and  
the other node is driven by the Phase Comparator and con-  
trols the internal 250 MHz Voltage Controlled Oscillator.  
This node can be examined for diagnostic purposes on the  
LPFLTR pin when the FLTREN bit of the CGMREG register  
is enabled. The LPFLTR pin is provided for diagnostic pur-  
poses only and should not be connected in any application.  
a
Using an LBC clock from another PLAYER device allows  
one PLAYER device to create a master clock to which  
a
a
other PLAYER devices in a system can be synchronized.  
TL/F/1170821  
FIGURE 3-18. Clock Generation Module Block Diagram  
23  
3.0 Functional Description (Continued)  
The voltage on the Loop Filter is set by the current pulses  
generated by the Phase Comparator. The voltage on the  
Loop Filter node controls the frequency of the 250 MHz  
VCO.  
3.6 STATION MANAGEMENT SUPPORT  
The Station Management Support Block provides a number  
of useful features to simplify the implementation of the Con-  
nection Management (CMT) portion of SMT.  
250 MHZ VOLTAGE CONTROLLED OSCILLATOR (VCO)  
These features eliminate the most severe CMT response  
time constraints imposed by the PC React and CF React  
times. The many integrated counters and timers also elimi-  
The internal Voltage Controlled Oscillator is a low gain VCO  
whose primary frequency of oscillation centers around  
250 MHz. The VCO produces little clock jitter due to its  
exceptional stability under all circumstances.  
Ð
Ð
nate the need for additional external devices.  
The following CMT features are supported:  
The VCO’s output frequency is proportional to the voltage  
on the Loop Filter node.  
PC React  
Ð
CF React  
Ð
Auto Scrubbing (TCF Timer)  
#
#
#
OUTPUT PHASING  
The Output Phasing block is a precision clock division circuit  
that produces clock signals of 4 distinct frequencies. Within  
the 12.5 MHz frequency, 5 clock signals with selectable 8 ns  
or 16 ns phase difference are produced.  
Timer, Idle Detection (TID Timer)  
#
#
#
Noise Event Counter (TNE Timer)  
Link Error Monitor (LEM Counter)  
PC REACT  
Ð
PC React is one of the timing restrictions imposed by Con-  
The following clock signals are produced:  
System Clock (CLK16/CLK32)  
Local Symbol Clock (LSC)  
Local Byte Clocks 1–5 (LBCn) (Divide by 10)  
Ð
nection Management (CMT). It is one of the two most crit-  
ical timing restrictions imposed (the other being CF Re-  
act.)  
Ð
System Clock (CLK16/CLK32)  
The ANSI SMT standard states that ‘‘PC React is the max-  
Ð
The System Clock is provided as an extra set of clock fre-  
quencies that may be used as a clock for non-FDDI chipset  
portions of a system or as a higher frequency System Inter-  
face clock for the MACSI device. This clock is derived by  
dividing the 125 MHz clock by 8 or 4 times.  
[
]
imum time for PCM Physical Connection Management to  
make a state transition to PC Break when QLS, a fault  
Ð
condition, or PC Start signal is present. This maximum  
Ð
time also places a limit on the time to react to a PC Stop  
Ð
signal. This limitation does not apply to any other PCM tran-  
The frequency is selectable through the CLKSEL bit of the  
MODE2 register. The output has built-in glitch suppression  
so that changing the CLKSEL bit will not result in glitches  
appearing at the output.  
sitions.’’ PC React puts a sharp time limit on how long it  
Ð
takes to transition to the PC Break state and transmit the  
Ð
correct line state when a PC Break transition is required.  
Ð
s
The range for the timer is PC React  
Ð
default value equal to 3.0 ms.  
3.0 ms and has a  
Local Symbol Clock (LSC)  
The Local Symbol Clock is a 40% HIGH/60% LOW duty  
cycle clock provided for use by the MACSI device and any  
external logic that needs to be synchronized to the Symbol  
timing.  
a
The PLAYER device contains a Trigger Definition Regis-  
ter and a set of CMT Condition Registers that can be used  
to satisfy the PC React timing.  
Ð
The Trigger Definition Register (TDR) controls two func-  
tions. First, it allows the selection of the line state(s) on  
which to trigger (SILS, MLS, HLS . . . ). For PC React, the  
This clock is derived by dividing the 125 MHz clock by 5.  
Local Byte Clocks 1–5 (LBCn)  
Ð
The Local Byte Clocks are provided for use by the MACSI  
device, by any external logic that needs to be synchronized  
to the Byte timing, and for use in concentrators to synchro-  
line states used would be the ones that caused a transition  
to the PC Break state from the current PCM state.  
Ð
Second, it allows specification of a line state to be transmit-  
ted when the trigger condition is met. For PC React, this is  
Ð
the line state that needs to be transmitted when a transition  
to the PC Break state occurs, which is Quiet Line State  
Ð
(QLS).  
a
nize the timing between multiple PLAYER devices.  
These clocks are derived by dividing the 125 MHz clock by  
10. The different phase relationships between the LBCs are  
achieved by tapping off of different outputs of a Johnson  
counter inside the Output Phasing block.  
The set of CMT Condition registers controls interrupt gener-  
ation when a trigger condition occurs. The CMT Condition  
Register set includes a CMT Condition Register (CMTCR), a  
The phase relationship (separation by 8 ns or 16 ns) of the  
LBCs is selected using the PH SEL pin.  
Ð
One of the LBCs must be used as the source of the feed-  
CMT Condition Comparison Register (CMTCCR), and  
CMT Condition Mask Register (CMTCMR).  
a
back input, FBK IN, which requires a 12.5 MHz frequency.  
a
Ð
When the PLAYER device is using a crystal as a refer-  
Line state triggering for PC React is enabled by selecting  
Ð
line states to trigger on from the Trigger Definition Register  
(TDR) bits 3-7.  
ence it does not matter which LBC is used as the feedback  
input. Typically the least loaded LBC is used. However,  
when using an external reference that is supplied by anoth-  
The Trigger Condition Occurred (TCO) bit of the CMTCR is  
automatically set when the trigger condition specified by the  
TDR register is met.  
a
er PLAYER device, it is important to select the LBC that  
keeps your system properly synchronized. Typically, all de-  
vices will use LBC1 as the feedback input.  
The line state specified by the Trigger Definition Register  
(TDR) bits 0–2 is then loaded into the Current Transmit  
Mode Register (CTSR), causing the line state to be trans-  
mitted.  
24  
3.0 Functional Description (Continued)  
If the TCO Mask (TCOM) bit of the CMTCMR is set, then  
whenever the CMTCR.TCO bit becomes set the Receive  
Condition Register B’s Connection Service Event  
(RCRB.CSE) bit will be set. This allows an interrupt to be  
generated for the trigger event.  
AUTO SCRUBBING  
Auto Scrubbing is an additional CMT feature that further  
enhances the automatic configuration switch setting in or-  
der to meet the CF React timing. When enabled, Auto  
Ð
Scrubbing causes  
2 PHY Invalid symbols followed by  
Ð
As an example, suppose the PCM state machine is in the  
ACTIVE state. From this state, if a Halt Line State (HLS) or  
Quiet Line State (QLS) is detected, or the Noise Threshold  
Scrub Symbol pairs (Idles) to be sourced for a user select-  
able duration (the scrubbing time) after a trigger condition  
(the same one used for PC React and CF React) occurs  
and prior to a change in the configuration switch setting on  
all indicate ports that will be changed.  
Ð
Ð
is reached, the state machine must move to the PC Break  
Ð
state and begin transmitting QLS. To implement this behav-  
ior when the PC ACTIVE state is entered, set  
Ð
Auto Scrubbing is enabled by setting the Enable Scrubbing  
2
TDR.TTM2–0 to 110 (Quiet Transmit), set TDR.TOHLS,  
TDR.TOQLS, and TDR.TONT and reset all other bits (TO-  
SILS and TOMLS). Also set CMTCMR.TCOM if an interrupt  
is desired.  
on Trigger Conditions (ESTC) bit of Mode Register  
(MODE2).  
The Scrub Timer Threshold Register (STTR) defines the du-  
ration of the scrubbing, which can last up to approximately  
10ms. The Scrub Timer Value Register (STVR) can be used  
to examine a snapshot of the upper 8 bits of the STTR  
register.  
CF REACT  
Ð
CF React is one of the timing restrictions imposed by Con-  
Ð
nection Management (CMT). It is one of the two most crit-  
ical timing restrictions imposed (the other being  
TIMER, IDLE DETECTION  
PC React).  
Ð
The ANSI SMT standard states that ‘‘CF React is the max-  
The Idle Detection Timer is required to flag the continued  
presence of the Idle Line State for a duration of 8 Idle Sym-  
bol pairs plus 1 symbol pair.  
Ð
[
]
imum time for CFM Configuration Management to recon-  
figure to remove a non-Active connection from the token  
path.’’  
This feature is implemented in the Receiver Block by the  
Super Idle Line State (SILS).  
s
The range for the timer is CF React  
Ð
default value equal to 3.0 ms.  
3.0 ms and has a  
NOISE EVENT COUNTER  
a
The PLAYER device contains a Trigger Transition Config-  
uration Register and a set of CMT Condition Registers that  
The Noise Event Counter can be used to time the duration  
between Noise Events (which are described in detail below)  
and to count frame sizes. The first feature is the most often  
recognized, but the second is often overlooked and can  
lead to potential difficulty if not properly set.  
can be used to satisfy the CF React timing.  
Ð
he Trigger Transition Configuration Register (TTCR) holds  
the new configuration switch settings to be loaded into the  
Configuration Register (CR) when a trigger condition occurs.  
The Noise Event Counter is implemented as a pair of down  
counters: one the actual Noise Counter and the other a  
Noise Counter Prescaling value. The Noise Threshold Reg-  
ister (NTR) and the Noise Prescale Threshold Register  
(NPTR) can be programmed to the counter’s initial value  
while the Current Noise Count Register (CNCR) and the  
Current Noise Prescale Count Register (CNPCR) provide a  
snapshot of the actual counter.  
Enabling line state triggering with the Trigger Definition Reg-  
ister (TDR) bits 3–7 also enables the CF React response.  
Ð
This means that whenever trigger conditions are actively  
used for PC React, the value of the TTCR register will be  
Ð
used also. This implies that it either must always then be  
loaded with the current configuration setting, causing no  
change to the CR, or it must be loaded with the appropriate  
value to accommodate the CF React function.  
Ð
The Noise Event Counter decrements whenever a Noise  
Line State (NLS), Line State Unknown (LSU), or Active Line  
State (ALS) is received and has its start value reloaded  
whenever it receives Halt Line State (HLS), Idle Line State  
(ILS), Master Line State (MLS), Quiet Line State (QLS), or  
No Signal Detect (NSD). The Noise Event Counter is also  
reset for a Start or End Delimiter. This means the Noise  
counter increments for bad events as well as for every data  
symbol in a frame. Should the Noise Counter expire, it indi-  
cates that a new line state (including ALS) has not been  
The Trigger Transition Configuration Register (TTCR) must  
be set the configuration desired when the trigger condition  
occurs. When the trigger condition occurs the value of this  
register is loaded into the Configuration Register (CR). Dur-  
ing this time writes to the CR are inhibited.  
To continue the example from the PC React description,  
Ð
suppose that when in the ACTIVE state for the PCM state  
machine, the CFM state machine is also in the THRU A  
state. If trigger conditions are enabled via the  
CMTCMR.TCOM bit and it is desired to not implement CF  
Ð
React, TTCR must be set to the present value of CR. If it is  
Ð
entered for NT MAX time. This indicates that either a  
Ð
frame is too long or that noise is being received.  
For this reason it is important to choose a value for the  
counter that is larger than the longest frame of 4500 bytes.  
The ANSI SMT specification recommends a value for  
NT MAX of 1.3ms for the noise threshold.  
Ð
A Noise Event is defined as follows:  
desired to not implement CF React then TTCR should be  
Ð
set to the value which would change the configuration to the  
WRAP state. The wrap conditions WRAP A or WRAP  
Ð
B
Ð
depend on which PHY gets reconfigured.  
A noise event is a noisebyte, or a byte of data which is not in  
line with the current line state, indicating error or corruption.  
25  
3.0 Functional Description (Continued)  
TABLE 3-5. Noise Event Description  
LINK ERROR MONITOR  
a
Link Error Monitoring is accomplished in the PLAYER de-  
vice through the Link Error Monitor Counter. The initial value  
of this down counter is set using the Link Error Threshold  
Register (LETR). A snapshot of the counter can be taken  
with the Current Link Error Count Register (CLECR).  
e
E
a
]
CD  
[
[
[
Noise Event  
SD  
#
#
#
E
#
a
e
a
a
]
AB)  
]
SD CD PI  
(II  
JK  
#
#
#
PI (PB  
E
SD CD  
II) AB  
#
Where:  
e
e
e
A Link Error is defined as follows:  
Logical AND  
Logical OR  
Logical NOT  
#
a
TABLE 3-6. Link Error Event Description  
E
E
a
a
ILS  
a
E
a
]
H)  
[
[
[
Link Error  
e
ALS (I  
I
SD  
xV  
[
[
Vx  
H
a
#
e
e
e
e
e
a
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
SD  
CD  
PB  
PLS  
PI  
Signal Detect  
Clock Detect  
Previous Byte  
E
a
a
E
a
]
JK)  
]
ALS  
ILS  
(II  
#
#
Event  
E
e
]
SD)  
ULS (PLS ALS)  
#
#
SB  
#
(HH HI  
E
E
a
Link Error Flag  
Ð
#
#
Ð
a
Previous Line State  
a
]
II  
JK)  
e
a
QLS  
#
PHY Invalid  
a
HLS  
a À  
[
ULS PLS  
MLS  
(ALS  
NLS  
ILS)  
e
]
TH)  
a
a
a
RH  
[
Set Link Error Flag  
Ð
ALS (HH  
#
NH  
Ð
a
Ó
]
a
SH  
ILS  
Idle Line State  
ALS  
ULS  
HLS  
QLS  
MLS  
NLS  
ULS  
Active Line State  
e
a
a
]
e
[
Clear Link Error Flag  
Ð
ALS JK  
#
Ð
Unknown Line State  
Halt Line State  
[
]
[
ILS JK  
#
ULS (PLS ALS Link  
#
#
HI  
Ð
a
E
E
#
a
a
II  
Error Flag  
Ð
SB  
(HH  
#
Quiet Line State  
Master Line State  
Noise Line State  
Unknown Line State  
]
JK)  
Where:  
E
a
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
Logical NOT  
Logical OR  
Logical AND  
e
e
e
I
Idle symbol  
#
ILS  
J
K
First symbol of start delimiter  
Second symbol of start  
Idle Line State  
ALS  
Active Line State  
delimiter  
ULS  
Unknown Line State  
Any symbol  
e
e
e
e
e
e
R
S
T
A
B
n
Reset symbol  
Set symbol  
x
I
Idle symbol  
End Delimiter  
H
J
K
Halt symbol  
a
a
a
a
a
a
n
n
R
R
S
S
T
T
First symbol of start delimiter  
Second symbol of start  
a
I
any data symbol  
delimiter  
e
e
e
e
e
V
R
S
T
Violation symbol  
Reset symbol  
Set symbol  
End delimiter symbol  
Data symbol converted to  
N
a
0000 by the PLAYER device  
Receiver Block in symbol pairs  
that contain a data and a control  
symbol  
e
e
e
PLS  
SD  
Previous Line State  
Signal Detect  
SB  
Stuff Byte: Byte inserted by EB  
before a JK symbol pair for  
recentering or due to off-axis JK  
26  
3.0 Functional Description (Continued)  
3.7 PHY-MAC INTERFACE  
to be in the Active Line State upon reception of the Starting  
Delimiter (JK symbol pair).  
NATIONAL BYTE-WIDE CODE  
During Idle Line State any non Idle symbols will be reflected  
as the code I uILS. If both symbols received during Idle Line  
a
The PLAYER device outputs the National byte-wide code  
Ê
State are Idle symbols, then the Symbol Decoder generates  
from its PHY Port Indicate Output to the MAC device. Each  
National byte-wide code may contain data or control codes  
or the line state information of the connection. Table 3-7  
lists all the possible outputs.  
I kILS as its output. Note the coded Known/Unknown Bit  
Ê
(b3) and the Last Known Line State (b20). The Receive  
State is 4 bits long and it represents either the PHY Invalid  
(0011) or the Idle Line State (1011) condition. The Known/  
Unknown Bit shows if the symbols received match the line  
state information in the last 3 bits.  
During Active Line State all data and control symbols are  
being repeated to the PHY Port Indicate Output with the  
exception of data in data-control mixture bytes. That data  
symbol is replaced by zero. If only one symbol in a byte is a  
control symbol, the data symbol will be replaced by 0000  
and the whole byte will be presented as control code. Note  
that the Line State Detector recognizes the incoming data  
During any line state other than Idle Line State or Active  
Line State, the Symbol Decoder generates the code V kLS  
Ê
if the incoming symbols match the current line state. The  
symbol decoder generates V uLS if the incoming symbols  
Ê
do not match the current line state.  
TABLE 3-7. National Byte Wide Code  
Symbol 1 Symbol 2  
Control Bit Control Bit  
National Code  
Control Bit Data  
Current Line State  
ALS  
Data  
Data  
0
0
1
1
1
1
x
x
x
1
1
x
x
x
n
0
1
0
1
1
x
1
x
x
1
x
1
x
x
n
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
n-n  
ALS  
n
C
N-C  
C-N  
C-C  
ALS  
C
n
ALS  
C
C
ILS  
I
I
I -k-LS  
Ê
ILS  
I
Not I  
I -u-LS  
Ê
ILS  
Not I  
Not I  
x
I
I -u-LS  
Ê
ILS  
Not I  
x
I -u-LS  
Ê
Stuff Byte during ILS  
Not ALS and Not ILS  
Not ALS and Not ILS  
Not ALS and Not ILS  
Not ALS and Not ILS  
Stuff Byte during Not ALS  
I -k-ILS  
Ê
V -k-LS  
M
M
Ê
M
Not M  
M
V -u-LS  
Ê
Not M  
Not M  
x
V -u-LS  
Ê
Not M  
x
V -u-LS  
Ê
V -k-LS, V -u-LS  
Ê
Ê
or L -u-ILS  
Ê
EB Overflow/Underflow  
1
1
1
0011 1011  
0011 1010  
1011 1000  
SMT PI Connection (LSU)  
Ð
Scrub Symbol Pair  
Where:  
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
À
Any data symbol in 0, 1, 2 . . . F  
Ó
n
À Ó  
Any control symbol in V, R, S, T, I, H  
C
N
I
e
0000  
Code for data symbol in a data control mixture byte  
Idle Symbol  
M
Any symbol that matches the current line state  
e
e
I
Ê
1011  
0011  
First symbols of the byte in Idle Line State  
PHY Invalid  
V
Ê
LS  
Line State  
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
e
ALS  
ILS  
NSD  
MLS  
HLS  
QLS  
NLS  
1
000  
001  
010  
100  
101  
110  
111  
e
e
e
u
k
x
Indicates symbol received does not match current line state  
Indicate symbol received matches current line state  
0
Don’t care  
27  
3.0 Functional Description (Continued)  
National Byte-Wide Code Example  
Incoming 5B Code  
98765 43210  
Decoded 4B Code  
National Byte-Wide Code (w/o parity)  
7654 3210  
C
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
3210  
1010  
1010  
1010  
1101  
–––  
C
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
3210  
C
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
11111 11111 (II)  
11111 11111 (II)  
11111 11111 (II)  
11000 10001 (JK)  
1010 (II)  
1010 (II)  
1010 (II)  
1102 (JK)  
1011 0001 (I -k-ILS)*  
Ê
1011 0001 (I -k-ILS)  
Ê
1011 0001 (I -k-ILS)  
Ê
1101 1101 (JK Symbols)  
–––-  
–––-  
–––-  
–––-  
–––-  
–––-  
(xx)  
(xx)  
(xx)  
–––  
–––  
–––  
(xx)  
(xx)  
(xx)  
–  
–  
–  
–  
–  
–  
(Data Symbols)  
(Data Symbols)  
(Data Symbols)  
–––  
–––  
(More data  
)
Ð
–––-  
–––-  
–––-  
–––-  
–––-  
–––-  
(xx)  
(xx)  
(xx)  
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
–  
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
–  
–  
–  
(xx)  
(xx)  
(xx)  
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
–  
–  
–  
–  
–  
–  
(Data Symbols)  
(Data Symbols)  
(Data Symbols)  
–  
–  
01101 00111 (TR)  
00111 00111 (RR)  
11111 11111 (II)  
11111 11111 (II)  
11111 11111 (II)  
11111 11111 (II)  
11111 11111 (II)  
00100 00100 (HH)  
00100 00100 (HH)  
00100 00100 (HH)  
00100 00100 (HH)  
00100 00100 (HH)  
00100 00100 (HH)  
00100 00100 (HH)  
00100 00100 (HH)  
00100 00100 (HH)  
00100 00100 (HH)  
11111 11111 (II)  
11111 11111 (II)  
11111 11111 (II)  
0101  
0110  
1010  
1010  
1010  
1010  
1010  
0001  
0001  
0001  
0001  
0001  
0001  
0001  
0001  
0001  
0001  
1010  
1010  
1010  
0110 (TR)  
0110 (RR)  
1010 (II)  
0101 0110 (T and R Symbols)  
0110 0110 (Two R Symbols)  
1010 1010 (Idle Symbols)  
1010 1010 (Idle Symbols)  
1010 (II)  
1010 (II)  
1011 0001 (I -k-ILS)  
Ê
1010 (II)  
1011 0001 (I -k-ILS)  
Ê
1010 (II)  
1011 0001 (I -k-ILS)  
Ê
0001 (HH)  
0001 (HH)  
0001 (HH)  
0001 (HH)  
0001 (HH)  
0001 (HH)  
0001 (HH)  
0001 (HH)  
0001 (HH)  
0001 (HH)  
1010 (II)  
1011 1001 (I -u-ILS)  
Ê
1011 1001 (I -u-ILS)  
Ê
1011 1001 (I -u-ILS)  
Ê
1011 1001 (I -u-ILS)  
Ê
1011 1001 (I -u-ILS)  
Ê
1011 1001 (I -u-ILS)  
Ê
1011 1001 (I -u-ILS)  
Ê
0011 0101 (V -k-HLS)  
Ê
0011 0101 (V -k-HLS)  
Ê
0011 0101 (V -k-HLS)  
Ê
0011 1101 (V -u-HLS)  
Ê
1010 (II)  
1011 0001 (I -k-ILS)  
Ê
1010 (II)  
1011 0001 (I -k-ILS)  
Ê
*Assume the receiver is in the Idle Line State.  
28  
3.0 Functional Description (Continued)  
or clock generation function, such as  
a Fiber Optic or  
3.8 PMD INTERFACE  
Shielded Twisted Pair (SDDI) PMDs. The second, Alternate  
PMD Interface can be used to support Unshielded Twisted  
Pair (UTP) PMDs that require external scrambling, and al-  
lows implementation with no external clock recovery or  
clock generation functions required. See Figure 3-21.  
a
The PMD Interface connects the PLAYER  
device to a  
standard FDDI Physical Media Connection such as a fiber  
optic transceiver or a copper twisted pair transceiver. It is a  
125 MHz full duplex serial connection.  
a
The DP83256 PLAYER device contains one PMD inter-  
a
PLAYER TO PMD CONNECTIONS  
face. This PMD Interface should be used for all PMD imple-  
mentations that do not require an external scrambler/  
descrambler function, clock recovery function, or clock  
generation function, such as a Fiber Optic or Shielded  
Twisted Pair (SDDI) PMDs.  
a
The following figures illustrate how the PLAYER device  
can be connected to various types of PMDs.  
Figure 3-20 shows how the DP83256, DP83256-AP, or  
a
DP83257 PLAYER device is connected to a Fiber Optic  
or Shielded Twisted Pair (SDDI) PMD using the Primary  
PMD Interface.  
a
The DP83256-AP and DP83257 PLAYER devices contain  
two PMD interfaces. The PMD Interface should be used for  
all PMD implementations that do not require an external  
scrambler/descrambler function, clock recovery function,  
Figure 3-21 shows how the DP83256-AP or DP83257  
a
PLAYER device is connected to an Unshielded Twisted  
Pair (UTP) PMD using the Alternate PMD Interface.  
TL/F/1170847  
FIGURE 3-20. Fiber Optic or STP PMD Connection  
TL/F/1170848  
FIGURE 3-21. UTP PMD Connections  
29  
3.0 Functional Description (Continued)  
INTERFACE ACTIVATION  
in the CGMREG register. The transmit clocks are disabled  
by default and should be left that way unless it is being  
used.  
The Primary PMD Interface is always enabled.  
The Alternate PMD Interface is enabled by programming a  
a
Note that when the Alternate PMD Interface is active, the  
Primary PMD Interface can not be used without the Alter-  
nate PMD Interface connections. Also note that the Long  
Internal Loopback (LILB) can not be used when the Alter-  
nate PMD Interface is activated.  
PLAYER register bit. To enable the interface, write a 1 to  
the APMDEN bit in the APMDREG register. The interface is  
off by default and should be left that way unless it is being  
used.  
It will also probably be necessary to enable the Transmit  
Clocks when using the Alternate PMD Interface. The Trans-  
mit Clocks (TXC) are enabled by writing a 1 to the TXCE bit  
30  
4.0 Modes of Operation  
a
The PLAYER device can operate in 4 basic modes: RUN,  
STOP, LOOPBACK, and CASCADE.  
4.1 RUN MODE  
RUN is the normal mode of operation.  
a
In this mode, the PLAYER device is configured to be con-  
nected to the media via the PMD transmitter and PMD re-  
ceiver at the PMD Interface. It is also connected to any  
a
other PLAYER device(s) and/or MACSI device(s) via the  
Port A and Port B Interfaces.  
a
While operating in the RUN mode, the PLAYER device  
receives and transmits Line States (Quiet, Halt, Master, Idle)  
and frames (Active LIne State).  
4.2 STOP MODE  
a
The PLAYER device operates in the STOP mode while it  
is being initialized or configured.  
a
The PLAYER device is also reset to the STOP mode au-  
tomatically when the RST pin is set to ground.  
E
a
When in STOP mode, the PLAYER device performs the  
following functions:  
Resets the Repeat Filter.  
#
Resets the Smoother.  
#
Resets the Receiver Block Line State Counters.  
#
Resets the Clock Recovery Module  
#
Flushes the Elasticity Buffer.  
#
Forces Line State Unknown in the Receiver Block.  
#
TL/F/1170823  
Outputs PHY Invalid condition symbol pairs through the  
#
FIGURE 4-1. Configuration Switch Loopback  
for DP83257  
k
l
PHY Data Indicate pins (AIP, AIC, AID 7:0 , BIP, BIC,  
k
l
BID 7:0 ), when port is enabled.  
Outputs Quiet symbol pairs through the PMD Data Re-  
g
quest pins (PMRD ).  
#
4.3 LOOPBACK MODE  
a
The PLAYER device provides 3 types of loopback tests:  
Configuration Switch Loopback, Short Internal Loopback,  
and Long Internal Loopback. These Loopback modes can  
be used to test different portions of the device.  
Configuration Switch Loopback  
The Configuration Switch Loopback can be used to test the  
data paths of the MACSI device(s) that are connected to the  
a
through the network.  
PLAYER  
device before transmitting and receiving data  
a
In the Configuration Switch Loopback mode, the PLAYER  
device Configuration Register (CR) can be programmed to  
perform the following functions:  
Select Port A PHY Request Data, Port B PHY Request  
Data, or PHY Invalid to connect to Port A PHY Indicate  
#
Data via the A IND Mux.  
Ð
Select Port A PHY Request Data, Port B PHY Request  
#
Data, or PHY Invalid to connect to Port B PHY Indicate  
Data via the B IND Mux.  
Ð
Connect data from the Receiver Block to the Transmitter  
#
a
Block via the Transmitter Mux. (The PLAYER device  
is repeating incoming data from the media in the Configu-  
Ð
ration Switch Loopback mode.)  
See Figure 4-1 and Figure 4-2.  
TL/F/1170824  
FIGURE 4-2. Configuration Switch Loopback  
for DP83256 and DP 83256-AP  
31  
4.0 Modes of Operation (Continued)  
Short Internal Loopback  
g
Ignores the PMD Data Indicate pins (PMID ),  
#
#
The Short Internal Loopback mode can be used to test the  
a
Clock Recovery function, and to test the data paths be-  
Outputs Quiet symbols through the PMD Data Request  
g
pins (PMRD ).  
functionality of the PLAYER  
device, not including the  
The level of the Quiet symbols transmitted through the  
g
PMRD pins during loopback is automatically set to the  
transmitter off level.  
a
tween the PLAYER  
ring insertion.  
device and MACSI devices before  
a
When in the Short Internal Loopback mode, the PLAYER  
device performs the following functions:  
If both Short Internal Loopback and Long Internal Loopback  
modes are selected, Long Internal Loopback mode will  
have priority over Short Internal Loopback mode. This is the  
Directs the output data of the Transmitter Block to the  
input of the Receiver Block through an internal path.  
#
a
longest loopback path within the PLAYER device.  
See Figure 4-3, Short Internal Loopback.  
TL/F/1170825  
FIGURE 4-3. Short Internal Loopback  
32  
4.0 Modes of Operation (Continued)  
Long Internal Loopback  
g
Ignores the PMD Data Indicate pins (PMID ),  
#
#
The Long Internal Loopback mode implements the longest  
a
loopback path that is completely within the PLAYER de-  
vice.  
Outputs Quiet symbols through the PMD Data Request  
g
pins (PMRD ).  
The level of the Quiet symbols transmitted through the  
g
PMRD pins during loopback is automatically set to the  
transmitter off level.  
The Long Internal Loopback mode can be used to test the  
a
functionality of the PLAYER device, including the Clock  
Recovery function, and to test the data paths between the  
If both Short Internal Loopback and Long Internal Loopback  
modes are selected, Long Internal Loopback mode will  
have priority over Short Internal Loopback mode. This is the  
a
PLAYER device and MACSI devices before ring insertion.  
a
When in the Long Internal Loopback mode, the PLAYER  
device performs the following functions:  
a
longest loopback path within the PLAYER device.  
Directs the output data of the Transmitter Block to the  
input of the Clock Recovery Module through an internal  
path.  
Note that the LILB path is disconnected and should not be  
used when the Alternate PMD Interface is active.  
#
See Figure 4-4, Long Internal Loopback.  
TL/F/1170826  
FIGURE 4-4. Long Internal Loopback  
33  
4.0 Modes of Operation (Continued)  
a
vice’s REF SEL pin is switched from using the REF IN  
Reference Select Reset occurs when the PLAYER  
de-  
4.4 DEVICE RESET  
Ð Ð  
input to using a crystal with the XTAL IN and XTAL OUT  
a
The revision B PLAYER device has five different levels of  
Ð Ð  
pins. This is the same as a Power Up Reset and is done  
because the crystal is going from a dead stop to an active  
state when REF SEL is switched. This reset, like the Pow-  
Ð
er Up Reset, takes about 10 ms from the falling edge of  
device ResetÐPower Up Reset, Hardware Reset, Player  
Reset, Reference Select Reset, and Stop Mode. The Re-  
sets can be used to return the whole device or a portion of  
the device to its default configuration.  
Power Up Reset begins automatically when power is first  
a
applied to the PLAYER device and reaches a certain volt-  
age level. Power Up Reset affects all of the modules in the  
REF SEL.  
Ð
Stop Mode is activated by writing a 0 to the RUN bit in the  
Mode Register. Stop Mode is a selective reset that resets  
the Clock Recovery Module and portions of the Player Mod-  
ule.  
a
PLAYER device, specifically the Clock Generation Mod-  
ule (CGM), Clock Recovery Module (CRM), and the Player  
Module, returning each module to its default configuration.  
This reset begins by waiting for the crystal to stabilize, then  
the CGM PLL proceeds to lock to the crystal and the rest of  
Changes from Revision A to Revision B:  
The previous descriptions describe the reset logic in the  
a
revision B PLAYER device. Two changes were made to  
the original revision A PLAYER device reset logic.  
a
the PLAYER device is reset. This reset takes the longest  
amount of time at approximately 10 ms from the time the  
a
a
PLAYER  
device’s power supply reaches 4.4V. Even  
First, the Hardware Reset was shortened by eliminating the  
requirement of having to wait for the crystal to settle before  
letting the Clock Generation Module try to lock to the crys-  
a
tal. This behavior is correct because the PLAYER device  
has already waited for the crystal to settle once during the  
though the Power Up Reset is usually effective, due to the  
variation in the start-up conditions of a systems power sup-  
ply, the Power Up Reset trigger can not be guaranteed to  
operate correctly. Therefore, a Hardware Reset should al-  
ways be performed on the PLAYER after waiting a mini-  
mum of 10 ms for the Power Up Reset to complete its reset  
attempt.  
a
a
Power Up Reset. The revision A PLAYER follows a Power  
Up Reset cycle when Hardware Reset is activated.  
Second, a full Power Up Reset is now done when the clock  
reference is switched to the crystal. This is necessary to  
allow the crystal time to start up when it is switched to from  
a
Hardware Reset occurs at the rising edge of PLAYER  
E
device’s RST pin. Hardware Reset affects all of the mod-  
ules in the PLAYER device, specifically the CGM, CRM  
a
the REF IN input. This reset is not performed on the revi-  
a
Ð
sion A PLAYER  
and the Player Module, returning each module to its default  
configuration. During Hardware Reset it is not necessary to  
force the Clock Generation Module to wait for the crystal to  
settle again at this time because it has settled in the time  
since the initial reset at power up. This reset takes the sec-  
ond longest amount of time at approximately 1 ms from the  
.
Recommendations:  
The following are some recommendations for using the re-  
a
set mechanisms of the PLAYER most effectively:  
1. Always wait a minimum of 10 ms after power-up before  
a
E
rising edge of RST.  
doing anything to the PLAYER device. 10 ms is a mini-  
mum, it may be desirable to wait longer if the system  
power supply or clock reference has not stabilized by this  
time.  
Player Reset is activated by writing a 1 to the PHYRST bit in  
Mode Register 2. Player Reset only affects the Player Mod-  
ule. This reset is the shortest and only takes about 3 ms  
from the completion of the register write. The device should  
not be accessed by the Control Bus during this reset.  
a
2. Always use the Hardware Reset to reset the PLAYER  
device after Power Up. This should be done after the  
initial Power Up waiting period of at least 10 ms.  
34  
4.0 Modes of Operation (Continued)  
Data frames must be a minimum of three bytes long  
(including the JK symbol pair). Smaller frames will  
cause Elasticity Buffer errors.  
#
#
4.5 CASCADE MODE  
a
The PLAYER device can operate in the Cascade (paral-  
lel) mode (Figure 4-5) which is used in high bandwidth,  
point-to-point data transfer applications. This is a non-FDDI  
mode of operation. This is only available on the DP83257  
device.  
Data frames must have a maximum size of 4500 bytes,  
with a JK starting delimiter and a T or R or S ending  
delimiter.  
3. Due to the different clock rates, the JK symbol pair may  
a
arrive at different times at each PLAYER device. The  
total skew between the fastest and slowest cascaded  
Concepts  
a
In the Cascade mode, multiple PLAYER devices are con-  
nected together to provide data transfer at multiples of the  
a
must not exceed 80 ns.  
PLAYER  
devices receiving the JK starting delimiter  
a
FDDI data rate. Two cascaded PLAYER devices provide  
data rate twice the FDDI data rate; three cascaded  
a
a
4. The first PLAYER device to receive a JK symbol pair  
will present it to the host system and release the Cas-  
a
PLAYER devices provide a data rate three times the FDDI  
data rate, etc.  
a
cade Ready signal. The PLAYER  
device will present  
Multiple data streams are transmitted in parallel over each  
a
pair of cascaded PLAYER devices. All data streams start  
simultaneously and begin with the JK symbol pair on each  
a
one more JK as it waits for the other PLAYER devices  
to recognize their JK. The maximum number of consecu-  
tive JKs that can be presented to the host is 2.  
a
PLAYER device.  
5. The Cascade Start signal is set to 1 when all the cascad-  
a
ed PLAYER devices release their Cascade Ready sig-  
nals.  
a
Data is synchronized at the receiver of each PLAYER de-  
vice by the JK symbol pair. Upon receiving a JK symbol pair,  
a
a PLAYER device asserts the Cascade Ready signal to  
indicate the beginning of data reception.  
6. Bit 4 (CSE) of the Receive Condition Register B (RCRB)  
is set to 1 if the Cascade Start signal (CS) is not set  
before the second falling edge of clock signal LBC from  
when Cascade Ready (CR) was released. CS has to be  
set approximately within 80 ns of CR release. This condi-  
a
The Cascade Ready signals of all PLAYER devices are  
open drain ANDed together to create the Cascade Start  
signal. The Cascade Start signal is used as the input to  
a
indicate that all PLAYER devices have received the JK  
a
a
tion signifies that not all cascaded PLAYER  
devices  
symbol pair. Data is now being received at every PLAYER  
device and can be transferred from the cascaded  
have received their respective JK symbol pair with the  
allowed skew range.  
a
PLAYER devices to the host system.  
a
7. PLAYER devices may not report a Cascaded Synchro-  
See Figure 4-6 for more information.  
nization Error if the JK symbols are corrupted in the point-  
to-point links.  
Operating Rules  
a
When the PLAYER device is operating in Cascade mode,  
the following rules apply:  
8. To guarantee integrity of the interframe information, the  
user must put at least 8 Idle symbol pairs between  
a
1. Data integrity can be guaranteed if the worst case PMD  
transmission skew between parallel media is less than  
40 ns. For example, this amounts to about 785 meters of  
fiber optic cable, assuming a 1% worst case variance.  
frames. The PLAYER device will function properly with  
only 4 Idle symbol pairs, however the interframe symbols  
may be corrupted with random non-JK symbols.  
The MACSI device could be used to provide the required  
framing and optional FCS support.  
2. Even though this is a non-FDDI application, the general  
rules for FDDI frames must be obeyed.  
35  
4.0 Modes of Operation (Continued)  
TL/F/1170827  
FIGURE 4-5. Parallel Transmission  
TL/F/1170828  
FIGURE 4-6. Cascade Mode of Operation  
36  
5.0 Registers  
a
The PLAYER device can be initialized, configured, and monitored using 64 8-bit registers. These registers are accessible  
through the Control Bus Interface.  
The following tables summarize each register’s attributes.  
Note: RESERVED Registers may be read at any time, although the values read are not specified. The results of RESERVED Register writes are not specified, and  
may have adverse implications. The user should not write to RESERVED Register locations.  
TABLE 5-1. Register Summary  
Access Rules  
Write  
Always  
Register  
Address  
Register  
Symbol  
Register Name  
Read  
00h  
01h  
02h  
03h  
04h  
05h  
06h  
07h  
08h  
09h  
0Ah  
0Bh  
0Ch  
0Dh  
0Eh  
0Fh  
10h  
11h  
12h  
13h  
14h  
15h  
16h  
17h  
18h  
19h  
1Ah  
1Bh  
1Ch  
MR  
Mode Register  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
CR  
Configuration Register  
Conditional  
Conditional  
Always  
ICR  
Interrupt Condition Register  
ICMR  
CTSR  
IJTR  
Interrupt Condition Mask Register  
Current Transmit State Register  
Injection Threshold Register  
Conditional  
Always  
ISRA  
Injection Symbol Register A  
Always  
ISRB  
Injection Symbol Register B  
Always  
CRSR  
RCRA  
RCRB  
RCMRA  
RCMRB  
NTR  
Current Receive State Register  
Receive Condition Register A  
Receive Condition Register B  
Receive Condition Mask Register A  
Receive Condition Mask Register B  
Noise Threshold Register  
Write Reject  
Conditional  
Conditional  
Always  
Always  
Always  
NPTR  
CNCR  
CNPCR  
STR  
Noise Prescale Threshold Register  
Current Noise Count Register  
Current Noise Prescale Count Register  
State Threshold Register  
Always  
Write Reject  
Write Reject  
Always  
SPTR  
CSCR  
CSPCR  
LETR  
CLECR  
UDR  
State Prescale Threshold Register  
Current State Count Register  
Current State Prescale Count Register  
Link Error Threshold Register  
Current Link Error Count Register  
User Definable Register  
Always  
Write Reject  
Write Reject  
Always  
Write Reject  
Always  
IDR  
Device ID Register  
Write Reject  
Write Reject  
Always  
CIJCR  
ICCR  
Current Injection Count Register  
Interrupt Condition Comparison Register  
Current Transmit State Comparison Register  
Receive Condition Comparison Register A  
CTSCR  
RCCRA  
Always  
Always  
37  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
TABLE 5-1. Register Summary (Continued)  
Access Rules  
Write  
Register  
Address  
Register  
Symbol  
Register Name  
Read  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
Always  
1Dh  
1Eh  
1Fh  
20h  
21h  
22h  
23h  
24h  
25h  
26h  
27h  
28h  
29h  
2Ah  
2Bh  
2Ch  
2Dh  
2Eh  
2Fh  
30h  
31h  
32h  
33h  
34h  
35h  
36h  
37h  
38h  
39h  
3Ah  
3Bh  
3Ch  
3Dh  
3Eh  
3Fh  
RCCRB  
MODE2  
CMTCCR  
CMTCR  
CMTMR  
RR22  
Receive Condition Comparison Register B  
Mode Register 2  
Always  
Conditional  
CMT Condition Comparison Register  
CMT Condition Register  
CMT Condition Mask Register  
Reserved Register 22  
Always  
Conditional  
Always  
DO NOT WRITE  
DO NOT WRITE  
Always  
RR23  
Reserved Register 23  
STTR  
Scrub Timer Threshold Register  
Scrub Timer Value Register  
Trigger Definition Register  
Trigger Transition Configuration Register  
Reserved Register 28  
STVR  
Write Reject  
TDR  
Always  
TTCR  
Always  
RR28  
DO NOT WRITE  
DO NOT WRITE  
DO NOT WRITE  
DO NOT WRITE  
DO NOT WRITE  
DO NOT WRITE  
DO NOT WRITE  
DO NOT WRITE  
DO NOT WRITE  
DO NOT WRITE  
DO NOT WRITE  
DO NOT WRITE  
DO NOT WRITE  
DO NOT WRITE  
DO NOT WRITE  
DO NOT WRITE  
DO NOT WRITE  
DO NOT WRITE  
DO NOT WRITE  
Always  
RR29  
Reserved Register 29  
RR2A  
RR2B  
RR2C  
RR2D  
RR2E  
Reserved Register 2A  
Reserved Register 2B  
Reserved Register 2C  
Reserved Register 2D  
Reserved Register 2E  
RR2F  
Reserved Register 2F  
RR30  
Reserved Register 30  
RR31  
Reserved Register 31  
RR32  
Reserved Register 32  
RR33  
Reserved Register 33  
RR34  
Reserved Register 34  
RR35  
Reserved Register 35  
RR36  
Reserved Register 36  
RR37  
Reserved Register 37  
RR38  
Reserved Register 38  
RR39  
Reserved Register 39  
RR3A  
CGMREG  
APMDREG  
GAINREG  
RR3E  
Reserved Register 3A  
Clock Generation Module Register  
Alternate PMD Register  
Gain Register  
Always  
Always  
Reserved Register 3E  
DO NOT WRITE  
DO NOT WRITE  
RR3F  
Reserved Register 3F  
38  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
TABLE 5-2. Register Bit Summary  
Bit Symbols  
Register  
Address  
Register  
Symbol  
D7  
RNRZ  
BIE  
D6  
TNRZ  
AIE  
D5  
TE  
D4  
TQL  
D3  
CM  
D2  
EXLB  
BIS0  
CCR  
D1  
ILB  
D0  
RUN  
00h  
01h  
02h  
03h  
04h  
05h  
06h  
07h  
08h  
09h  
0Ah  
0Bh  
0Ch  
0Dh  
0Eh  
0Fh  
10h  
11h  
12h  
13h  
14h  
15h  
16h  
17h  
18h  
19h  
1Ah  
1Bh  
1Ch  
1Dh  
1Eh  
1Fh  
20h  
21h  
22h  
MR  
CR  
TRS1  
RCA  
TRS0  
LEMT  
LEMTM  
IC1  
BIS1  
AIS1  
CPE  
AIS0  
DPE  
ICR  
UDI  
RCB  
CWI  
ICMR  
CTSR  
IJTR  
UDIM  
RES  
RCBM  
PRDPE  
IJT6  
RCAM  
SE  
CWIM  
IC0  
CCRM  
TM2  
CPEM  
TM1  
DPEM  
TM0  
IJT7  
IIJ5  
IJT4  
IJT3  
IJT2  
IJT1  
IJT0  
ISRA  
RES  
RES  
RES  
IJS4  
IJS3  
IJS2  
IJS1  
IJS0  
ISRB  
RES  
RES  
RES  
IJS9  
IJS8  
IJS7  
IJS6  
IJS5  
CRSR  
RCRA  
RCRB  
RCMRA  
RCMRB  
NTR  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
LSU  
LS2  
LS1  
LS0  
LSUPI  
RES  
LSC  
NT  
NLS  
MLS  
HLS  
QLS  
NSD  
SILS  
EBOU  
NTM  
EBOUM  
NT5  
CSE  
LSUPV  
MLSM  
LSUPVM  
NT3  
ALS  
ST  
ILS  
LSUPIM  
RES  
LSCM  
SILSM  
NT6  
NLSM  
CSEM  
NT4  
HLSM  
ALSM  
NT2  
QLSM  
STM  
NT1  
NSDM  
ILSM  
NT0  
RES  
NPTR  
CNCR  
CNPCR  
STR  
NPT7  
NCLSCD  
CNPC7  
RES  
NPT6  
CNC6  
CNPC6  
ST6  
NPT5  
CNC5  
CNPC5  
ST5  
NPT4  
CNC4  
CNPC4  
ST4  
NPT3  
CNC3  
CNPC3  
ST3  
NPT2  
CNC2  
CNPC2  
ST2  
NPT1  
CNC1  
CNPC1  
ST1  
NPT0  
CNC0  
CNPC0  
ST0  
SPTR  
CSCR  
CSPCR  
LETR  
CLECR  
UDR  
SPT7  
SCLSCD  
CSPC7  
LET7  
LEC7  
RES  
SPT6  
CSC6  
CSPC6  
LET6  
LEC6  
RES  
SPT5  
CSC5  
CSPC5  
LET5  
LEC5  
RES  
SPT4  
CSC4  
CSPC4  
LET4  
LEC4  
RES  
SPT3  
CSC3  
CSPC3  
LET3  
LEC3  
EB1  
SPT2  
CSC2  
CSPC2  
LET2  
LEC2  
EB0  
SPT1  
CSC1  
CSPC1  
LET1  
LEC1  
SB1  
SPT0  
CSC0  
CSPC0  
LET0  
LEC0  
SB0  
IDR  
DID7  
DID6  
IJC6  
DID5  
IJC5  
DID4  
IJC4  
DID3  
IJC3  
DID2  
IJC2  
DID1  
IJC1  
DID0  
IJC0  
CIJCR  
ICCR  
IJC7  
UDIC  
RESC  
LSUPIC  
RESC  
ESTC  
TCOC  
TCO  
RCBC  
PRDPEC  
LSCC  
SILSC  
RES  
RCAC  
SEC  
LEMTC  
IC1C  
NLSC  
CSEC  
RES  
CWIC  
IC0C  
MLSC  
LSUPVC  
RES  
CCRC  
TM2C  
HLSC  
ALSC  
RES  
CPEC  
TM1C  
QLSC  
STC  
DPEC  
TM0C  
NSDC  
ILSC  
PHYRST  
RES  
CTSCR  
RCCRA  
RCCRB  
MODE2  
CMTCCR  
CMTCR  
CMTMR  
RR22  
NTC  
EBOUC  
CLKSEL  
RES  
CBPE  
RES  
STEC  
STE  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
TCOM  
RES  
STEM  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
39  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
TABLE 5-2. Register Bit Summary (Continued)  
Bit Symbols  
Register  
Address  
Register  
Symbol  
D7  
RES  
STT7  
STV7  
TONT  
BIE  
D6  
RES  
STT6  
STV6  
TOQLS  
AIE  
D5  
RES  
D4  
RES  
D3  
RES  
D2  
RES  
STT2  
STV2  
TTM2  
BIS0  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
D1  
RES  
STT1  
STV1  
TTM1  
AIS1  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
D0  
RES  
STT0  
STV0  
TTM0  
AIS0  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
23h  
24h  
25h  
26h  
27h  
28h  
29h  
2Ah  
2Bh  
2Ch  
2Dh  
2Eh  
2Fh  
30h  
31h  
32h  
33h  
34h  
35h  
36h  
37h  
38h  
39h  
3Ah  
3Bh  
3Ch  
3Dh  
3Eh  
3Fh  
RR23  
STTR  
STVR  
TDR  
STT5  
STV5  
TOHLS  
TRS1  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
FLTREN  
RES  
FILT0  
RES  
RES  
STT4  
STV4  
TOMLS  
TRS0  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
STT3  
STV3  
TOSILS  
BIS1  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
TXCE  
APMDEN  
RES  
RES  
RES  
TTCR  
RR28  
RR29  
RR2A  
RR2B  
RR2C  
RR2D  
RR2E  
RR2F  
RR30  
RR31  
RR32  
RR33  
RR34  
RR35  
RR36  
RR37  
RR38  
RR39  
RR3A  
CGMREG  
APMDREG  
GAINREG  
RR3E  
RR3F  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
FILT2  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
FILT1  
RES  
RES  
40  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
TABLE 5-3. Register Reset Value Summary  
Reset Contents  
Register  
Register  
Address  
Symbol  
MSB-LSB  
00 h  
Comments  
00h  
01h  
02h  
03h  
04h  
05h  
06h  
07h  
08h  
09h  
0Ah  
0Bh  
0Ch  
0Dh  
0Eh  
0Fh  
10h  
11h  
12h  
13h  
14h  
15h  
16h  
17h  
18h  
19h  
1Ah  
1Bh  
1Ch  
1Dh  
MR  
CR  
00 h  
ICR  
X001 0000 B  
00 h  
depends on sense pins  
ICMR  
CTSR  
IJTR  
A2 h  
00 h  
ISRA  
00 h  
ISRB  
00 h  
CRSR  
RCRA  
RCRB  
RCMRA  
RCMRB  
NTR  
0A h  
20 h  
00X0 0010 B  
00 h  
depends on EB state  
00 h  
00 h  
NPTR  
CNCR  
CNPCR  
STR  
00 h  
00 h  
00 h  
00 h  
SPTR  
CSCR  
CSPCR  
LETR  
CLECR  
UDR  
00 h  
00 h  
00 h  
00 h  
00 h  
000X 00XX B  
XX h  
depends on sense pins  
depends on chip version  
IDR  
CIJCR  
ICCR  
00 h  
00 h  
same as reg 02 h if reg 02 h is read first  
same as reg 04 h if reg 04 h is read first  
same as reg 09 h if reg 09 h is read first  
same as reg 0A h if reg 0A h is read first  
CTSCR  
RCCRA  
RCCRB  
00 h  
00 h  
00 h  
41  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
TABLE 5-3. Register Reset Value Summary (Continued)  
Reset Contents  
Register  
Address  
Register  
Symbol  
MSB-LSB  
00 h  
00 h  
00 h  
00 h  
XX h  
XX h  
00 h  
00 h  
00 h  
00 h  
XX h  
XX h  
XX h  
XX h  
XX h  
XX h  
XX h  
XX h  
XX h  
XX h  
XX h  
XX h  
XX h  
XX h  
XX h  
XX h  
XX h  
XX h  
XX h  
05 h  
00 h  
00 h  
XX h  
XX h  
Comments  
1Eh  
1Fh  
20h  
21h  
22h  
23h  
24h  
25h  
26h  
27h  
28h  
29h  
2Ah  
2Bh  
2Ch  
2Dh  
2Eh  
2Fh  
30h  
31h  
32h  
33h  
34h  
35h  
36h  
37h  
38h  
39h  
3Ah  
3Bh  
3Ch  
3Dh  
3Eh  
3Fh  
MODE2  
CMTCCR  
CMTCR  
CMTMR  
RR22  
RR23  
STTR  
STVR  
TDR  
TTCR  
RR28  
RR29  
RR2A  
RR2B  
RR2C  
RR2D  
RR2E  
RR2F  
RR30  
RR31  
RR32  
RR33  
RR34  
RR35  
RR36  
RR37  
RR38  
RR39  
RR3A  
CGMREG  
APMDREG  
GAINREG  
RR3E  
RR3F  
42  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.1 MODE REGISTER (MR)  
a
The Mode Register is used to initialize and configure the PLAYER device.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
00h  
Always  
Always  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
TQL  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
RNRZ  
TNRZ  
TE  
CM  
LILB  
SILB  
RUN  
Bit Symbol  
Description  
E
RUN/ STOP:  
D0 RUN  
0: Enables the STOP mode. Refer to section 4.2, STOP MODE, for more information.  
1: Normal operation (i.e. RUN mode).  
E
Note: The RUN bit is automatically set to 0 when the RST pin is asserted (i.e. set to ground).  
D1 SILB  
SHORT INTERNAL LOOPBACK:  
0: Disables Internal Loopback mode (i.e. normal operation).  
1: Enables Internal Loopback mode.  
Refer to section 4.3, LOOPBACK MODE, for more information.  
D2 LILB  
LONG INTERNAL LOOPBACK:  
0: Disables Long Internal Loopback mode (i.e. normal operation).  
1: Enables Long Internal Loopback mode.  
Note: Long Internal Loopback should not be used when the Alternate PMD Interface is enabled.  
Refer to section 4.3, LOOPBACK MODE, for more information.  
D3 CM  
D4 TQL  
D5 TE  
CASCADE MODE:  
a
0: Disables synchronization of cascaded PLAYER devices.  
1: Enables the synchronization of cascaded PLAYER devices.  
a
Refer to section 4.4, CASCADE MODE, for more information.  
Note: Cascade Mode is only available on the DP83257 device. The other devices do not have the required CS and CR pins. Do not set this bit for  
any device but the DP83257.  
TRANSMIT QUIET LEVEL: This bit is used to program the transmission level of the Quiet symbols during Off  
Transmit mode (OTM) only.  
a e  
a e  
0: Low (PMD OFF) level Quiet symbols are transmitted through the PMD Data Request pins (i.e. PMRD  
b e  
low,  
PMRD  
1: High (PMD ON) level Quiet symbols are transmitted through the PMD Data Request pins (i.e. PMRD  
b e  
high).  
high,  
PMRD  
low).  
TRANSMIT ENABLE: The TE bit controls the action of the PMD transmitter Enable (TXE) pin. When TE is 0, the  
TXE output disables the PMD transmitter; when TE is 1, the PMD transmitter is disabled during the Off Transmit  
Mode (OTM) and enabled otherwise. The On and Off level of the TXE is depended on the PMD transmitter Enable  
a
Level (TEL) pin to the PLAYER device. The following rules summaries the output of TXE.  
e
e
1. If TE 0, then TXE Off  
2. If TE 1 and OTM, then TXE Off  
e
e
e
e
3. If TE 1 and not OTM, then TXE On.  
D6 TNRZ  
D7 RNRZ  
TRANSMIT NRZ DATA:  
0: Transmits data in Non-Return-To-Zero-Invert-On-Ones (NRZI) format (normal format).  
1: Transmits data in Non-Return-To-Zero format (NRZ).  
RECEIVE NRZ DATA:  
0: Receives data in Non-Return-To-Zero-Invert-On-Ones format (NRZI) (normal format).  
1: Receives data in Non-Return-To-Zero format (NRZ).  
43  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.2 CONFIGURATION REGISTER (CR)  
The Configuration Register controls the Configuration Switch Block and enables/disables both the A and B ports. The CR can  
be used to create a number of Configuration Loopback paths.  
The CR is conditionally writable because the TTCR can be writing a new value into the register if this feature is enabled.  
Note that the A Request and B Indicate port are offered only on the DP83257, and not in the DP83256. For further informa-  
Ð Ð  
tion, refer to section 3.4, CONFIGURATION SWITCH.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
01h  
Always  
Conditional  
D7  
D6  
D5  
TRS1  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
BIE  
AIE  
TRS0  
BIS1  
BIS0  
AIS1  
AIS0  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
k l k l  
INDICATE SELECTOR 0, 1 : The A Indicate Selector 0, 1 bits selects one of the four  
Ð
D0, D1 AIS0, AIS1  
A
Ð
k
l
Configuration Switch data buses for the A Indicate output port (AIP, AIC, AID 7:0 ).  
Ð
AIS1  
AIS0  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
PHY Invalid Bus  
Receiver Bus  
A
B
Request Bus  
Request Bus  
Ð
Ð
k l k l  
B INDICATE SELECTOR 0, 1 : The B Indicate Selector 0, 1 bits selects one of the four  
Ð Ð  
D2, D3 BIS0, BIS1  
k
l
)
Configuration Switch data buses for the B Indicate output port (BIP, BIC, BID 7:0  
Ð
BIS1  
BIS0  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
PHY Invalid Bus  
Receiver Bus  
A
B
Request Bus  
Request Bus  
Ð
Ð
Note: Even though this bit can be set and/or cleared in the DP83256, it will not affect any I/Os since the DP83256 does not offer a  
Indicate port.  
B
Ð
k
l
k
l
D4, D5 TRS0, TRS1 TRANSMIT REQUEST SELECTOR 0, 1 : The Transmit Request Selector 0, 1 bits select one of  
the four Configuration Switch data buses for the input to the Transmitter Block.  
TRS1 TRS0  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
PHY Invalid Bus  
Receiver Bus  
A
B
Request Bus  
Request Bus  
Ð
Ð
k
l
Note: If the PLAYER device is in Active Transmit Mode (i.e. the Transmit Mode bits (TM 2:0 ) of the Current Transmit State  
a
Register (CTSR) are set to 00) and the PHY Invalid Bus is selected, then the PLAYER device will transmit a maximum of four  
a
Halt symbol pairs and then continuous Idle symbols due to the Repeat Filter when in the Repeat state.  
D6  
D7  
AIE  
BIE  
A
INDICATE ENABLE:  
Ð
0: Disables the A Indicate output port. The A Indicate port pins will be tri-stated when the port is  
Ð
Ð
disabled.  
k
l
1: Enables the A Indicate output port (AIP, AIC, AID 7:0 ).  
Ð
B
INDICATE ENABLE:  
Ð
0: Disables the B Indicate output port. The B Indicate port pins will be tri-stated when the port is  
Ð
Ð
disabled.  
k
l
1: Enables the B Indicate output port (BIP, BIC, BID 7:0 ).  
Ð
Note: Even though this bit can be set and/or cleared in the DP83256, it will not affect any I/Os since the DP83256 does not offer a  
B
Indicate port.  
Ð
44  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.3 INTERRUPT CONDITION REGISTER (ICR)  
The Interrupt Condition Register records the occurrence of an internal error event, the detection of Line State, an unsuccessful  
write by the Control Bus Interface, the expiration of an internal counter, or the assertion of one or more of the User Definable  
Sense pins.  
E
The Interrupt Condition Register will assert the Interrupt pin ( INT) when one or more bits within the register are set to 1 and  
the corresponding mask bits in the Interrupt Condition Mask Register (ICMR) are also set to 1.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
02h  
Always  
Conditional  
D7  
D6  
D5  
RCA  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
UDI  
RCB  
LEMT  
CWI  
CCR  
CPE  
DPE  
Bit Symbol  
Description  
D0 DPE  
PHY REQUEST DATA PARITY ERROR: This bit will be set to 1 when:  
Ð Ð  
1. The PHY Request Data Parity Enable bit (PRDPE) of the Current Transmit State Register (CTSR) is set to 1 and  
2. The Transmitter Block detects a parity error in the incoming PHY Request Data.  
The source of the data can be from the PHY Invalid Bus, the Receive Bus, the A Bus, or the B Bus of the  
Ð
Ð
Configuration Switch.  
Note: Parity is only checked on data that goes into the transmitter block. This means that any data that is just routed through the configuration  
switch without going into the transmit block is not checked.  
D1 CPE  
D2 CCR  
Control Bus DATA PARITY ERROR: This bit will be set to 1 when the Control Bus Interface detects a parity error  
k
l
in the incoming Control Bus Data (CBD 7:0 ), CBP during a write cycle.  
Control Bus WRITE COMMAND REJECT: This bit will be set to 1 when an attempt to write into one of the  
following read-only registers is made:  
Current Receive State Register (Register 08, CRSR)  
Current Noise Count Register (Register 0F, CNCR)  
Current Noise Prescale Count Register (Register 10, CNPCR)  
Current State Count Register (Register 13, CSCR)  
Current State Prescale Count Register (Register 14, CSPCR)  
Current Link Error Count Register (Register 16, CLECR)  
Device ID Register (Register 18, IDR)  
Current Injection Count Register (Register 19, CIJCR)  
Scrub Timer Value Register (Register 25, STVR)  
45  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
Bit Symbol  
Description  
D3 CWI  
CONDITIONAL WRITE INHIBIT: Set to 1 when bits within mentioned registers do not match bits in the  
corresponding compare register. This bit ensures that new (i.e. unread) data is not inadvertently cleared while old  
data is being cleared through the Control Bus Interface.  
This bit is set to 1 to indicate that a bit in a condition write register was not written because it had changed since  
the previous read. The following registers are affected:  
Interrupt Condition Register (Register 02, ICR)  
Current Transmit State Register (Register 04, CTSR)  
Receive Condition Register A (Register 09, RCRA)  
Receive Condition Register B (Register 0A, RCRB)  
CMT Condition Register (Register 20, CMTCR)  
The previous registers are affected when they differ from the value of the corresponding bit in the following  
registers respectively:  
Interrupt Condition Compare Register (Register 1A, ICCR)  
Current Transmit State Compare Register (Register 1B, CTSCR)  
Receive Condition Compare Register A (Register 1C, RCCRA)  
Receive Condition Compare Register B (Register 1D, RCCRB)  
CMT Condition Compare Register (Register 1F, CMTCCR)  
This bit must be cleared by software. Note that this differs from the MACSI, BMAC and BSI device bits of the same  
name.  
The Configuration Register (Register 01, CR) can not be written to during scrubbing.  
D4 LEMT  
LINK ERROR MONITOR THRESHOLD: This bit is set to 1 when the internal 8-bit Link Error Monitor Counter  
reaches zero. It will remain set and is cleared by software.  
E
e
During the reset process (i.e. RST GND), the Link Error Monitor Threshold bit is set to 1 because the Link  
Error Monitor Counter is initialized to zero.  
D5 RCA  
RECEIVE CONDITION A: This bit is set to 1 when:  
1. One or more bits in the Receive Condition Register A (RCRA) is set to 1 and  
2. The corresponding mask bits in the Receive Condition Mask Register A (RCMRA) are also set to 1.  
In order to clear (i.e. set to 0) the Receive Condition A bit, the bits within the Receive Condition Register A that are  
set to 1 must first be either cleared or masked.  
D6 RCB  
RECEIVE CONDITION B: This bit is set to 1 when:  
1. One or more bits in the Receive Condition Register B (RCRB) is set to 1 and  
2. The corresponding mask bits in the Receive Condition Mask Register A (RCMRB) are also set to 1.  
In order to clear (i.e. set to 0) the Receive Condition B bit, the bits within the Receive Condition Register B that are  
set to 1 must first be either cleared or masked.  
D7 UDI  
USER DEFINABLE INTERRUPT: This bit is set to 1 when one or any combination of the Sense Bits (SB0, SB1, or  
SB2) in the User Definable Register (UDR) are set to 1.  
In order to clear (i.e. set to 0) the User Definable Interrupt Bit, all Sense Bits must be set to 0.  
46  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.4 INTERRUPT CONDITION MASK REGISTER (ICMR)  
The Interrupt Condition Mask Register allows the user to dynamically select which events will generate an interrupt.  
E e  
The Interrupt pin will be asserted (i.e. INT GND) when one or more bits within the Interrupt Condition Register (ICR) are set  
to 1 and the corresponding mask bits in this register are also set to 1.  
This register is cleared (i.e. set to 0) and all interrupts are initially masked during the reset process.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
03h  
Always  
Always  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
LEMTM  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
UDIM  
RCBM  
RCAM  
CWIM  
CCRM  
CPEM  
DPEM  
Bit Symbol  
Description  
D0 DPEM  
PHY REQUEST DATA PARITY ERROR MASK: The mask bit for the PHY Request Data Parity Error bit  
РРР 
(DPE) of the Interrupt Condition Register (ICR).  
D1 CPEM  
D2 CCRM  
D3 CWIM  
Control Bus DATA PARITY ERROR MASK: The mask bit for the Control Bus Data Parity Error bit (CPE) of the  
Interrupt Condition Register (ICR).  
Control Bus WRITE COMMAND REJECT MASK: The mask bit for the Control Bus Write Command Reject bit  
(CCR) of the Interrupt Condition Register (ICR).  
CONDITIONAL WRITE INHIBIT MASK: The mask bit for the Conditional Write Inhibit bit (CWI) of the Interrupt  
Condition Register (ICR).  
D4 LEMTM LINK ERROR MONITOR THRESHOLD MASK: The mask bit for the Link Error Monitor Threshold bit (LEMT) of  
the Interrupt Condition Register (ICR).  
D5 RCAM  
D6 RCBM  
D7 UDIM  
RECEIVE CONDITION A MASK: The mask bit for the Receive Condition A bit (RCA) of the Interrupt Condition  
Register (ICR).  
RECEIVE CONDITION B MASK: The mask bit for the Receive Condition B bit (RCB) of the Interrupt Condition  
Register (ICR).  
USER DEFINABLE INTERRUPT MASK: The mask bit for the User Definable Interrupt bit (UDI) of the Interrupt  
Condition Register (ICR).  
47  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.5 CURRENT TRANSMIT STATE REGISTER (CTSR)  
The Current Transmit State Register can program the Transmitter Block to internally generate and transmit Idle, Master, Halt,  
Quiet, or user programmable symbol pairs, in addition to the normal transmission of incoming PHY Request data. The Smoother  
and PHY Request Data Parity are also enabled and disabled through this register.  
When the Trigger Definition register (TDR) is used, the CTSR can automatically be set to a preprogrammed line state when a  
trigger condition occurs. This capability can be used to implement both PC React and CF React.  
Ð
Ð
The Transmit Modes have priority over the Repeat Filter and Smoother outputs. The Injection Symbols have priority over the  
Transmit Modes.  
k
l
e
is set to 1), and the Reserved bit (b7) is set to 1. All other bits of this register are cleared (i.e. set to 0) during the reset process.  
E
e
During the reset process (i.e. RST GND) the Transmit Mode is set to Off (TM 2:0  
010), the Smoother is enabled (i.e. SE  
When the TDR register is used to respond to trigger conditions the CTSR will be blocked when the TDR register transmit mode  
is copied into the CTSR. The Write Reject bit of the ICR will be set if any writes are attempted at this time.  
Note: This register has no effect while the device is in Stop Mode.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
04h  
Always  
Conditional  
D7  
D6  
D5  
SE  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
RES  
PRDPE  
IC1  
IC0  
TM2  
TM1  
TM0  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
k
l
D0, D1, TM0, TM1, Transmit Mode 0, 1, 2 : These bits select one of the 6 transmission modes for the PMD Request Data  
g
output port (TXD ).  
D2  
TM2  
TM2 TM1 TM0  
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
Active Transmit Mode (ATM): Normal transmission of incoming PHY Request data.  
Idle Transmit Mode (ITM): Transmission of Idle symbol pairs (11111 11111).  
Off Transmit Mode (OTM): Transmission of Quiet symbol pairs (00000 00000) and  
deassertion of the PMD transmitter Enable pin (TXE).  
Note: This is the default transmit mode after reset.  
0
1
1
0
1
0
Reserved: Reserved for future use. Users are discouraged from using this transmit  
mode. If selected, however, the transmitter will generate Quiet symbol pairs (00000  
00000).  
Master Transmit Mode (MTM): Transmission of Halt and Quiet symbol pairs (00100  
00000).  
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
Halt Transmit Mode (HTM): Transmission of Halt symbol pairs (00100 00100).  
Quiet Transmit Mode (QTM): Transmission of Quiet symbol pairs (00000 00000).  
Reserved: Reserved for future use. Users are discouraged from using this transmit  
mode. If selected, however, the transmitter will generate Quiet symbol pairs  
(00000 00000).  
48  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
k
l
D3, D4 IC0, IC1 Injection Control 0, 1 : These bits select one of the 4 injection modes. The injection modes have priority  
over data from the Smoother, Repeat Filter, Encoder, and Transmit Modes.  
a
IC0 is the only bit of the register that is automatically cleared by the PLAYER device after the One Shot  
Injection is executed. The automatic clear of IC0 during the One Shot mode can be interpreted as a  
acknowledgment that the One Shot has been completed.  
IC1 IC0  
0
0
No Injection: The normal transmission of incoming PHY Request data (i.e. symbols are not  
injected).  
0
1
One Shot: In one shot mode, the contents of Injection Symbol Register A (ISRA) and Injection  
Symbol Register B (ISRB) are injected n symbol pairs after a JK, where n is the programmed  
value of the Injection Count Register (IJCR). If IJCR is set to 0, the JK symbol pair is replaced by  
a
ISRA and ISRB. Once the One Shot is executed, the PLAYER device automatically sets IC0 to  
0, thereby returning to normal transmission of data.  
1
1
0
1
Periodic: In Periodic mode, the contents of Injection Symbol Register A (ISRA) and Injection  
Symbol Register B (ISRB) are injected every n-th symbol pair, where n is the programmed value  
of the Injection Count Register (IJCR). If IJCR is set to 0, all data symbols are replaced with ISRA  
and ISRB.  
Note: The inserted symbol is not automatically aligned to a JK boundary.  
Continuous: In Continuous mode, all data symbols are replaced with the contents of Injection  
Symbol Register A (ISRA) and Injection Symbol Register B (ISRB).  
D5  
SE  
SMOOTHER ENABLE:  
0:  
1:  
Disables the Smoother.  
Enables the Smoother.  
When enabled, the Smoother can redistribute Idle symbol pairs which were added or deleted by the  
local or upstream receivers.  
Note: Once the counter has started, it will continue to count irrespective of the incoming symbols with the exception of a JK symbol pair.  
D6  
D7  
PRDPE  
RES  
PHY REQUEST DATA PARITY ENABLE:  
Ð
0:  
1:  
Disables PHY Request Data parity.  
Ð
Enables PHY Request Data parity.  
Ð
RESERVED: Reserved for future use.  
Note: Users are discouraged from using this bit. The reserved bit is set to 1 during the reset process. It may be set or cleared without any  
a
effects to the functionality of the PLAYER device.  
49  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.6 INJECTION THRESHOLD REGISTER (IJTR)  
k
l
The Injection Threshold Register, in conjunction with the Injection Control bits (IC 1:0 ) in the Current Transmit State Register  
(CTSR), set the frequency at which the contents of the Injection Symbol Register A (ISRA) and Injection Symbol Register B  
(ISRB) are inserted into the data stream. It contains the start value for the Injection Counter.  
The Injection Threshold Register value is loaded into the Injection Counter when the counter reaches zero or during every  
Control Bus Interface write-cycle of this register.  
The Injection Counter is an 8-bit down-counter which decrements every 80 ns. It’s current value is read for CIJCR.  
k
l
k
l
The counter is active only during One Shot or Periodic Injection Modes (i.e. Injection Control 1:0 bits (IC 1:0 ) of the  
Current Transmit State Register (CTSR) are set to either 01 or 10). The Transmitter Block will replace a data symbol pair with  
ISRA and ISRB when the counter reaches 0 and the Injection Mode is either One Shot or Periodic.  
If the Injection Threshold Register is set to 0 during the One Shot mode, the JK will be replaced with ISRA and ISRB. If the  
Injection Threshold Register is set to 0 during the Periodic mode, all data symbols are replaced with ISRA and ISRB.  
E
e
The counter is initialized to 0 during the reset process (i.e. RST GND).  
For further information, see the INJECTION CONTROL LOGIC section.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
05h  
Always  
Always  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
IJT4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
IJT7  
IJT6  
IJT5  
IJT3  
IJT2  
IJT1  
IJT0  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
k
l
D0-D7 IJT0IJT7 INJECTION THRESHOLD BIT 0-7 : Start value for the Injection Counter.  
IJT0 is the Least Significant Bit (LSB).  
50  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.7 INJECTION SYMBOL REGISTER A (ISRA)  
The Injection Symbol Register A, along with Injection Symbol Register B, contains the programmable value (already in 5B code)  
that can be inserted to replace the data symbol pairs.  
In One Shot mode, ISRA and ISRB are injected n bytes after a JK, where n is the programmed value of the Injection Threshold  
Register. In the Periodic mode, ISRA and ISRB are injected every n-th symbol pair. In the Continuous mode, all data symbols are  
replaced with ISRA and ISRB.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
06h  
Always  
Always  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
IJS4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
RES  
RES  
RES  
IJS3  
IJS2  
IJS1  
IJS0  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
k
l
D0D4 IJS0IJS4 INJECTION SYMBOL BIT 0-4 : Symbol to be injected.  
IJS0 is the Least Significant Bit (LSB) and goes out onto the media last.  
D5D7 RES  
RESERVED: Reserved for future use.  
Note: Users are discouraged from using these bits. The reserved bits are set to 0 during the reset process. They may be set or cleared  
a
without any effects to the functionality of the PLAYER device.  
51  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.8 INJECTION SYMBOL REGISTER B (ISRB)  
The Injection Symbol Register B, along with Injection Symbol Register A, contains the programmable value (already in 5B code)  
that will replace the data symbol pairs.  
In One Shot mode, ISRA and ISRB are injected n bytes after a JK, where n is the programmed value of the Injection Threshold  
Register. In the Periodic mode, ISRA and ISRB are injected every n-th symbol pair. In the Continuous mode, all data symbols are  
replaced with ISRA and ISRB.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
07h  
Always  
Always  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
IJS9  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
RES  
RES  
RES  
IJS8  
IJS7  
IJS6  
IJS5  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
k
l
D0D4 IJS0IJS4 INJECTION SYMBOL BIT 0-4 : Symbol to be injected.  
IJS0 is the Least Significant Bit (LSB) and goes out onto the media last.  
D5D7 RES  
RESERVED: Reserved for future use.  
Note: Users are discouraged from using these bits. The reserved bits are set to 0 during the reset process. They may be set or cleared  
a
without any effects to the functionality of the PLAYER device.  
52  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.9 CURRENT RECEIVE STATE REGISTER (CRSR)  
The Current Receive State Register represents the current line state being detected by the Receiver Block. When the Receiver  
Block recognizes a new Line State, the bits corresponding to the previous line state are cleared, and the bits corresponding to  
the new line state are set.  
E
e
During the reset process ( RST GND), the Receiver Block is forced to Line State Unknown (i.e. the Line State Unknown bit  
(LSU) is set to 1).  
a
Note: Users are discouraged from writing to this register. An attempt to write into this register will cause the PLAYER device to ignore the Control Bus write cycle  
and set the Control Bus Write Command Reject bit (CCR) of the Interrupt Condition Register (ICR) to 1.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
08h  
Always  
Write Reject  
D7  
D6  
D5  
RES  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
RES  
RES  
RES  
LSU  
LS2  
LS1  
LS0  
Bit  
D0,  
D1, D2 LS2  
Symbol  
Description  
k
l
LS0, LS1, LINE STATE 0, 1, 2 : These bits represent the current Line State being detected by the Receiver Block.  
Once the Receiver Block recognizes a new line state, the bits corresponding to the previous line state are  
cleared, and the bits corresponding to the new line state are set.  
LS2 LS1 LS0  
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
Active Line State (ALS): Received a JK symbol pair (11000 10001), possibly followed  
by data symbols.  
Idle Line State (ILS): Received a minimum of two consecutive Idle symbol pairs  
(11111 11111).  
No Signal Detect (NSD): The Signal Detect (SD) has been deasserted, indicating that  
a
the PLAYER device is not receiving data from the PMD receiver or that clock detect is  
not being received from the Clock Recovery Module. SD is ignored during internal  
loopback.  
Note: NSD is the default value when the device is in Stop mode. However, while in Stop mode certain data  
a
patterns entering the Receiver Block may cause the PLAYER to set LS0. Therefore, the user may see  
either the NSD (010) or Reserved Value (011) during Stop mode.  
0
1
1
0
1
0
Reserved: Reserved for future use.  
Master Line State (MLS): Received a minimum of 8 consecutive Halt-Quiet symbol  
pairs (00100 00000).  
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
Halt Line State (HLS): Received a minimum of 8 consecutive Halt symbol pairs  
(00100 00100).  
Quiet Line State (QLS): Received a minimum of 8 consecutive Quiet symbol pairs  
(00000 00000).  
Noise Line State (NLS): Detected a minimum of 16 noise events. Refer to the Receiver  
Block description for further information on noise events.  
D3  
LSU  
LINE STATE UNKNOWN: The Receiver Block has not detected the minimum conditions to enter a known  
k
l
line state. When the Line State Unknown bit is set, LS 2:0 represent the most recently known line state.  
D4-D7 RES  
RESERVED: Reserved for future use.  
Note: Users are discouraged from using these bits. The reserved bits are reset to 0 during the reset process. They may be set or cleared  
a
without any effects to the functionality of the PLAYER device.  
53  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.10 RECEIVE CONDITION REGISTER A (RCRA)  
The Receive Condition Register A maintains a historical record of the Line States recognized by the Receiver Block.  
When a new Line State is entered, the bit corresponding to that line state is set to 1. The bits corresponding to the previous Line  
a
States are not cleared by the PLAYER device, thereby maintaining a record of the Line States detected.  
The Receive Condition A bit (RCA) of the Interrupt Condition Register (ICR) will be set to 1 when one or more bits within the  
Receive Condition Register A is set to 1 and the corresponding mask bit(s) in Receive Condition Mask Register A (RCMRA) is  
also set to 1.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
09h  
Always  
Conditional  
D7  
D6  
D5  
NT  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
LSUPI  
LSC  
NLS  
MLS  
HLS  
QLS  
NSD  
Bit Symbol  
Description  
D0 NSD  
NO SIGNAL DETECT: Indicates that the Signal Detect pin (TTLSD) has been deasserted and that the Clock  
Recovery Module is not receiving data from the PMD receiver.  
D1 QLS  
D2 HLS  
D3 MLS  
D4 NLS  
D5 NT  
QUIET LINE STATE: Received a minimum of eight consecutive Quiet symbol pairs (00000 00000).  
HALT LINE STATE: Received a minimum of eight consecutive Halt symbol pairs (00100 00100).  
MASTER LINE STATE: Received a minimum of eight consecutive Halt-Quiet symbol pairs (00100 00000).  
NOISE LINE STATE: Detected a minimum of sixteen noise events.  
NOISE THRESHOLD: This bit is set to 1 when the internal Noise Counter reaches 0. It will remain set until a value  
equal to or greater than one is loaded into the Noise Threshold Register or Noise Prescale Threshold Register.  
E
e
During the reset process (i.e. RST GND), since the Noise Counter is initialized to 0, the Noise Threshold bit will  
be set to 1.  
D6 LSC  
LINE STATE CHANGE: A line state change has been detected.  
D7 LSUPI  
LINE STATE UNKNOWN AND PHY INVALID: The Receiver Block has not detected the minimum conditions to  
enter a known line state.  
In addition, the most recently known line state was one of the following line states: No Signal Detect, Quiet Line  
State, Halt Line State, Master Line State, or Noise Line State.  
54  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.11 RECEIVE CONDITION REGISTER B (RCRB)  
The Receive Condition Register B maintains a historical record of the Lines States recognized by the Receiver Block.  
When a new Line State is entered, the bit corresponding to that line state is set to 1. The bits corresponding to the previous Line  
States are not cleared, thereby maintaining a record of the Line States detected.  
The Receive Condition B bit (RCB) of the Interrupt Condition Register (ICR) will be set to 1 when one or more bits within the  
Receive Condition Register B is set to 1 and the corresponding mask bit(s) in Receive Condition Mask Register B (RCMRB) is  
also set to 1.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
0Ah  
Always  
Conditional  
D7  
D6  
D5  
EBOU  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
RES  
SILS  
CSE  
LSUPV  
ALS  
ST  
ILS  
Bit Symbol  
D0 ILS  
Description  
IDLE LINE STATE: Received a minimum of two consecutive Idle symbol pairs (11111 11111).  
D1 ST  
STATE THRESHOLD: This bit will be set to 1 when the internal State Counter reaches zero. It will remain set until  
a value equal to or greater than one is loaded into the State Threshold Register or State Prescale Threshold  
Register, and this register is cleared.  
E
e
During the reset process (i.e. RST GND), since the State Counter is initialized to 0, the State Threshold bit is  
set to 1.  
D2 ALS  
ACTIVE LINE STATE: Received a JK symbol pair (11000 10001), and possibly data symbols following.  
D3 LSUPV  
LINE STATE UNKNOWN AND PHY VALID: The Receiver Block has not detected the minimum conditions to  
enter a known line state.  
In addition, the most recently known line state was either Active Line State or Idle Line State.  
D4 CSE  
CONNECTION SERVICE EVENT/CASCADE SYNCHRONIZATION ERROR:  
When one or more bits in the CMT Condition Register (CMTCR) are set and the corresponding bit(s) in the CMT  
Condition Mask Register (CMTCMR) are set, the Connection service event bit will be set to a 1.  
When a synchronization error occurs, the Cascade Synchronization Error bit is set to 1. A synchronization error  
occurs if the Cascade Start signal (CS) is not asserted within approximately 80 ns of Cascade Ready (CR) release.  
Note: Cascade mode and the CMT features can not be used at the same time.  
Note: Cascade mode is only supported on the DP83257 device.  
D5 EBOU  
ELASTICITY BUFFER UNDERFLOW / OVERFLOW: The Elasticity Buffer has either overflowed or underflowed.  
The Elasticity Buffer will automatically recover if the condition which caused the error is only transient, but the  
event bit will remain set until cleared by software.  
D6 SILS  
D7 RES  
SUPER IDLE LINE STATE: Received a minimum of eight Idle symbol pairs (11111 11111).  
RESERVED: Reserved for future use.  
Note: Users are discouraged from using these bits. The reserved bits are reset to 0 during the reset process. They may be set or cleared without  
a
any effects to the functionality of the PLAYER device  
55  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.12 RECEIVE CONDITION MASK REGISTER A (RCMRA)  
The Receive Condition Mask Register A allows the user to dynamically select which events will generate an interrupt.  
The Receive Condition A bit (RCA) of the Interrupt Condition Register (ICR) will be set to 1 when one or more bits within the  
Receive Condition Register A (RCRA) is set to 1 and the corresponding mask bit(s) in this register is also set to 1.  
Since this register is cleared (i.e. set to 0) during the reset process, all interrupts are initially masked.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
0Bh  
Always  
Always  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
LSUPIM  
LSCM  
NTM  
NLSM  
MLSM  
HLSM  
QLSM  
NSDM  
Bit Symbol  
Description  
D0 NSDM  
NO SIGNAL DETECT MASK: The mask bit for the No Signal Detect bit (NSD) of the Receive Condition Register A  
(RCRA).  
D1 QLSM  
D2 HLSM  
D3 MLSM  
D4 NLSM  
D5 NTM  
QUIET LINE STATE MASK: The mask bit for the Quiet Line State bit (QLS) of the Receive Condition Register A  
(RCRA).  
HALT LINE STATE MASK: The mask bit for the Halt Line State bit (HLS) of the Receive Condition Register A  
(RCRA).  
MASTER LINE STATE MASK: The mask bit for the Master Line State bit (MLS) of the Receive Condition Register  
A (RCRA).  
NOISE LINE STATE MASK: The mask bit for the Noise Line State bit (NLS) of the Receive Condition Register A  
(RCRA).  
NOISE THRESHOLD MASK: The mask bit for the Noise Threshold bit (NT) of the Receive Condition Register A  
(RCRA).  
D6 LSCM  
LINE STATE CHANGE MASK: The mask bit for the Line State Change bit (LSC) of the Receive Condition  
Register A (RCRA).  
D7 LSUPIM LINE STATE UNKNOWN AND PHY INVALID MASK: The mask bit for the Line State Unknown and PHY Invalid  
bit (LSUPI) of the Receive Condition Register A (RCRA).  
56  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.13 RECEIVE CONDITION MASK REGISTER B (RCMRB)  
The Receive Condition Mask Register B allows the user to dynamically select which events will generate an interrupt.  
The Receive Condition B bit (RCB) of the Interrupt Condition Register (ICR) will be set to 1 when one or more bits within the  
Receive Condition Register B (RCRA) is set to 1 and the corresponding mask bits in this register is also set to 1.  
Since this register is cleared (i.e. set to 0) during the reset process, all interrupts are initially masked.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
0Ch  
Always  
Always  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
CSEM  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
RESM  
SILSM  
EBOUM  
LSUPVM  
ALSM  
STM  
ILSM  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
D0 ILSM  
D1 STM  
D2 ALSM  
IDLE LINE STATE MASK: The mask bit for the Idle Line State bit (ILS) of the Receive Condition Register B  
(RCRB).  
STATE THRESHOLD MASK: The mask bit for the State Threshold bit (ST) of the Receive Condition Register B  
(RCRB).  
ACTIVE LINE STATE MASK: The mask bit for the Active Line State bit (ALS) of the Receive Condition Register  
B (RCRB).  
D3 LSUPVM LINE STATE UNKNOWN AND PHY VALID MASK: The mask bit for the Line State Unknown and PHY Valid bit  
(LSUPV) of the Receive Condition Register B (RCRB).  
D4 CSEM  
CASCADE SYNCHRONIZATION ERROR MASK/CONNECTION SERVICE EVENT MASK:  
The mask bit for the Cascade Synchronization Error/Connection service event bit (CSE) of the Receive Condition  
Register B (RCRB).  
D5 EBOUM  
D6 SILSM  
D7 RESM  
ELASTICITY BUFFER OVERFLOW/UNDERFLOW MASK: The mask bit for the Elasticity Buffer Overflow/  
Underflow bit (EBOU) of the Receive Condition Register B (RCRB).  
SUPER IDLE LINE STATE MASK: The mask bit for the Super Idle Line State bit (SILS) of the Receive Condition  
Register B (RCRB).  
RESERVED MASK: The mask bit for the Reserved bit (RES) of the Receive Condition Register B (RCRB).  
57  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.14 NOISE THRESHOLD REGISTER (NTR)  
The Noise Threshold Register contains the start value for the Noise Timer. This threshold register is used in conjunction with the  
Noise Prescale Threshold register for setting the maximum allowable time between entry to ILS, HLS, MLS, ALS, or NSD line  
states. The Noise timer is used to implement the TNE timing requirement of PCM. The Noise timer decrements by one for every  
a
80 x (NPTR 1) ns in case of Noise events. As a result, the internal noise counter takes the following amount of time to reach  
zero:  
a
((NPTR 1) x NTR  
a
NPTR) x 80 ns  
The threshold values for the Noise Counter and Noise Prescale Counter are simultaneously loaded into both counters if one of  
the following conditions is true:  
1. Both the Noise Counter and Noise Prescale Counter reach zero and the current Line State is either Noise Line State, Active  
Line State, or Line State Unknown.  
or  
2. The current Line State is either Halt Line State, Idle Line State, Master Line State, Quiet Line State, or No Signal Detect.  
or  
3. The Noise Threshold Register or Noise Prescale Threshold Register goes through a Control Bus Interface write cycle.  
In addition, the value of the Noise Prescale Threshold register is loaded into the Noise Prescale Counter if the Noise Prescale  
Counter reaches zero.  
The Noise Counter and Noise Prescale Counter will continue to count, without resetting or reloading the threshold values, if a  
Line State change occurs and the new line state is either Noise Line State, Active Line State, or Line State Unknown.  
When both the Noise Threshold Counter and Noise Counter both reach zero, the Noise Threshold bit of the Receive Condition  
Register A will be set.  
The recommended default value for the NTR register is 40h and for the NPTR register is F9h which corresponds to 1.3 ms as  
specified in the ANSI standard.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
0Dh  
Always  
Always  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
NT4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
RES  
NT6  
NT5  
NT3  
NT2  
NT1  
NT0  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
k
l
D0-D6 NT0-NT6 NOISE THRESHOLD BIT 0-6 : Start value for the Noise Counter.  
NT0 is the Least Significant Bit (LSB).  
D7  
RES  
RESERVED: Reserved for future use.  
Note: Users are discouraged from using this bit. Write data is ignored since the reserved bit is permanently set to 0.  
58  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.15 NOISE PRESCALE THRESHOLD REGISTER (NPTR)  
The Noise Prescale Threshold Register contains the start value for the Noise Prescale Timer. This threshold register is used in  
conjunction with the Noise Threshold register for setting the maximum allowable time between entry to ILS, HLS, MLS, ALS, or  
NSD. The Noise timer is used to implement the TNE timing requirement of PCM. The Noise Prescale threshold controls how  
often the Noise timer is decremented. When the Noise Prescale Timer reaches zero, it reloads the count with the contents of the  
Noise Prescale Threshold Register and also causes the Noise Timer to decrement.  
The threshold values for the Noise Counter and Noise Prescale Counter are simultaneously loaded into both counters if one of  
the following conditions is true:  
1. Both the Noise Counter and Noise Prescale Counter reach zero and the current Line State is either Noise Line State, Active  
Line State, or Line State Unknown.  
or  
2. The Current Line State is either Halt Line State. Idle Line State, Master Line State, Quiet Line State, or No Signal Detect  
or  
3. The Noise Threshold Register or Noise Prescale Threshold Register goes through a Control Bus Interface write cycle.  
In addition, the value of the Noise Prescale Threshold Register is loaded into the Noise Prescale Counter if the Noise Prescale  
Counter reaches zero.  
The Noise Counter and Noise Prescale Counter will continue to count, without resetting or reloading the threshold values, if a  
Line State change occurs and the new line state is either Noise Line State, Active Line State, or Line State Unknown.  
When both the Noise Threshold Counter and Noise Counter both reach zero, the Noise Threshold bit of the Receive Condition  
Register A will be set.  
See the NTR register description for default value recommendations.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
0Eh  
Always  
Always  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
NPT4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
NPT7  
NPT6  
NPT5  
NPT3  
NPT2  
NPT1  
NPT0  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
k
l
D0-D7 NPT0-NPT7 NOISE PRESCALE THRESHOLD BIT 0-7 : Start value for the Noise Prescale Timer.  
NPT0 is the Least Significant Bit (LSB).  
59  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.16 CURRENT NOISE COUNT REGISTER (CNCR)  
The Current Noise Count Register takes a snap-shot of the Noise Timer during every Control Bus Interface read cycle of this  
register.  
During a Control Bus Interface write cycle, the Control Bus Write Command Reject bit (CCR) of the Interrupt Condition Register  
(ICR) will be set to 1 and will ignore a write cycle.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
0Fh  
Always  
Write Reject  
D7  
D6  
D5  
CNC5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
NCLSCD  
CNC6  
CNC4  
CNC3  
CNC2  
CNC1  
CNC0  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
k
l
D0D6 CNC0CNC6 CURRENT NOISE COUNT BIT 0–6 : Snapshot of the Noise Counter.  
D7  
NCLSCD  
NOISE COUNTER LINE STATE CHANGE DETECTION  
60  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.17 CURRENT NOISE PRESCALE COUNT REGISTER (CNPCR)  
The Current Noise Prescale Count Register takes a snap-shot of the Noise Prescale Timer during every Control Bus Interface  
read cycle of this register.  
During a Control Bus Interface write cycle, the Control Bus Write Command Reject bit (CCR) of the Interrupt Condition Register  
(ICR) will be set to 1 and will ignore a write cycle.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
10h  
Always  
Write Reject  
D7  
D6  
D5  
CNPC5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
CNPC7  
CNPC6  
CNPC4  
CNPC3  
CNPC2  
CNPC1  
CNPC0  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
k
l
D0D7 CNPC0–7 CURRENT NOISE PRESCALE COUNT BIT 0–7 : Snapshot of the Noise Prescale Timer.  
61  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.18 STATE THRESHOLD REGISTER (STR)  
The State Threshold Register contains the start value for the State Timer. This timer is used in conjunction with the State  
Prescale Timer to count the Line State duration. The State Timer will decrement every 80 ns if the State Prescale Timer is zero  
and the current Line State is Halt Line State, Idle Line State, Master Line State, Quiet Line State, or No Signal Detect. The State  
Timer takes  
a
a
SPTR) x 80 ns  
((SPTR 1) x STR  
to reach zero during a continuous line state condition.  
The threshold values for the State Timer and State Prescale Timer are simultaneously loaded into both counters if one of the  
following conditions is true:  
1. Both the State Timer and State Prescale Timer reach zero and the current Line State is Halt Line State, Idle Line State,  
Master Line State, Quiet Line State, or No Signal Detect.  
or  
2. A line state change occurs and the new Line State is Halt Line State, Idle Line State, Master Line State, Quiet Line State, or  
No Signal Detect.  
or  
3. The State Threshold Register or State Prescale Threshold Register goes through a Control Bus Interface write cycle.  
In addition, the value of the State Prescale Threshold Register is loaded into the State Prescale Counter if the State Prescale  
Timer reaches zero.  
The State Timer and State Prescale Timer will reset by reloading the threshold values, if a Line State change occurs and the  
new Line State is Halt Line State, Idle Line State, Master Line State, Quiet Line State, or No Signal Detect. On detection of ALS,  
NLS, or LSU the timer will not decrement.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
11h  
Always  
Always  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
ST4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
RES  
ST6  
ST5  
ST3  
ST2  
ST1  
ST0  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
k
l
D0-D6 ST0-ST6 STATE THRESHOLD BIT 0-6 : Start value for the State Timer.  
ST0 is the Least Significant Bit (LSB).  
D7  
RES  
RESERVED: Reserved for future use.  
Note: Users are discouraged from using this bit. Write data is ignored since the reserved bit is permanently set to 0.  
62  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.19 STATE PRESCALE THRESHOLD REGISTER (SPTR)  
The State Prescale Threshold Register contains the start value for the State Prescale Timer. The State Prescale Timer is a down  
counter. It is used in conjunction with the State Timer to count the Line State duration.  
The threshold values for the State Timer and State Prescale Timer are simultaneously loaded into both timers if one of the  
following conditions is true:  
1. Both the State Timer and State Prescale Timer reach zero and the current Line State is Halt Line State, Idle Line State,  
Master Line State, Quiet Line State, or No Signal Detect.  
or  
2. A Line State change occurs and the new Line State is Halt Line State, Idle Line State, Master Line State, Quiet Line State, or  
No Signal Detect.  
or  
3. The State Threshold Register or State Prescale Threshold Register goes through a Control Bus Interface write cycle.  
The State Prescale Timer will decrement every 80 ns if the current Line State is Halt Line State, Idle Line State, Master Line  
State, Quiet Line State, or No Signal Detect.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
12h  
Always  
Always  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
SPT4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
SPT7  
SPT6  
SPT5  
SPT3  
SPT2  
SPT1  
SPT0  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
k
l
D0D7 SPT0SPT7 STATE PRESCALE THRESHOLD BIT 0–7 : Start value for the State Prescale Timer.  
SPT0 is the Least Significant Bit (LSB).  
63  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.20 CURRENT STATE COUNT REGISTER (CSCR)  
The Current State Count Register takes a snap-shot of the State Counter during every Control Bus Interface read cycle of this  
register.  
During a Control Bus Interface write cycle, the Control Bus Write Command Reject bit (CCR) of the Interrupt Condition Register  
(ICR) will be set to 1 and will ignore a write cycle.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
13h  
Always  
Write Reject  
D7  
D6  
D5  
CSC5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
SCLSCD  
CSC6  
CSC4  
CSC3  
CSC2  
CSC1  
CSC0  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
k
l
D0D6 CSC0CSC6 CURRENT STATE COUNT BIT 0–6 : Snapshot of the State Counter.  
D7  
SCLSCD  
STATE COUNTER LINE STATE CHANGE DETECTION  
64  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.21 CURRENT STATE PRESCALE COUNT REGISTER (CSPCR)  
The Current State Prescale Count Register takes a snap-shot of the State Prescale Counter during every Control Bus Interface  
read cycle of this register.  
During a Control Bus Interface write cycle, the Control Bus Write Command Reject bit (CCR) of the Interrupt Condition Register  
(ICR) will be set to 1 and will ignore a write cycle.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
14h  
Always  
Write Reject  
D7  
D6  
D5  
CSPC5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
CSPC7  
CSPC6  
CSPC4  
CSPC3  
CSPC2  
CSPC1  
CSPC0  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
k
l
D0D7 CSPC0–7 CURRENT STATE PRESCALE COUNT 0–7 : Snapshot of the State Prescale Counter.  
65  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.22 LINK ERROR THRESHOLD REGISTER (LETR)  
The Link Error Threshold Register contains the start value for the Link Error Monitor Counter. It is an 8-bit down-counter which  
decrements if link errors are detected.  
When the Counter reaches 0, the Link Error Monitor Threshold Register value is loaded into the Link Error Monitor Counter and  
the Link Error Monitor Threshold bit (LEMT) of the Interrupt Condition Register (ICR) is set to one.  
The Link Error Monitor Threshold Register value is also loaded into the Link Error Monitor Counter during every Control Bus  
Interface write cycle of LETR.  
E
e
The counter is initialized to 0 during the reset process (i.e. RST GND).  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
15h  
Always  
Always  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
LET4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
LET7  
LET6  
LET5  
LET3  
LET2  
LET1  
LET0  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
k
l
D0D7 LET0LET7 LINK ERROR THRESHOLD BIT 0–7 : Start value for the Link Error Monitor Counter.  
LET0 is the Least Significant Bit (LSB).  
66  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.23 CURRENT LINK ERROR COUNT REGISTER (CLECR)  
The Current Link Error Count Register takes a snap-shot of the Link Error Monitor Counter during every Control Bus Interface  
read cycle of this register.  
During a Control Bus Interface write cycle, the Control Bus Write Command Reject bit (CCR) of the Interrupt Condition Register  
(ICR) will be set to 1 and will ignore a write cycle.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
16h  
Always  
Write Reject  
D7  
D6  
D5  
LEC5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
LEC7  
LEC6  
LEC4  
LEC3  
LEC2  
LEC1  
LEC0  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
k
l
D0D7 LEC0LEC7 LINK ERROR COUNT BIT 0–7 : Snapshot of the Link Error Monitor Counter.  
67  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.24 USER DEFINABLE REGISTER (UDR)  
a
The User Definable Register is used to monitor and control events which are external to the PLAYER device.  
The value of the Sense Bits reflect the asserted/deasserted state of their corresponding Sense pins. On the other hand, the  
Enable bits assert/deassert the Enable pins.  
Note: SB2 and EB2 are only effective for the DP83257.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
17h  
Always  
Always  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
SB2  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
RES  
EB2  
RES  
EB1  
EB0  
SB1  
SB0  
Bit Symbol  
Description  
e
D0 SB0  
SENSE BIT 0: This bit is set to 1 if the Sense Pin 0 (SP0) is asserted (i.e. SP0  
V ) for a minimum amount of  
CC  
time. Once the asserted signal is latched, Sense Bit 0 can only be cleared through the Control Bus Interface, even  
if the signal is deasserted. This ensures that the Control Bus Interface will record the source of events which can  
cause interrupts in a traceable manner.  
e
D1 SB1  
D2 EB0  
SENSE BIT 1: This bit is set to 1 if the Sense Pin 1 (SP1) is asserted (i.e. SP1  
V ) for a minimum amount of  
CC  
time. Once the asserted signal is latched, Sense Bit 1 can only be cleared through the Control Bus Interface, even  
if the signal is deasserted. This ensures that the Control Bus Interface will record the source of events which can  
cause interrupts in a traceable manner.  
ENABLE BIT 0: The Enable Bit 0 allows control of external logic through the Control Bus Interface. The User  
Definable Enable Pin 0 (EP0) is asserted/deasserted by this bit.  
e
EP0 is deasserted (i.e. EP0 GND).  
0:  
1:  
e
EP0 is asserted (i.e. EP0  
V
CC  
).  
D3 EB1  
ENABLE BIT 1: This bit allows control of external logic through the Control Bus Interface. The User Definable  
Enable Pin 0 (EP0) is asserted/deasserted by this bit.  
e
EP1 is deasserted (i.e. EP1 GND).  
0:  
1:  
e
EP1 is asserted (i.e. EP1  
V
CC  
).  
e
D4 SB2  
SENSE BIT 2: This bit is set to 1 if the Sense Pin 2 (SP2) is asserted (i.e. SP2  
V ) for a minimum amount of  
CC  
time. Once the asserted signal is latched, Sense Bit 2 can only be cleared through the Control Bus Interface, even  
if the signal is deasserted. This ensures that the Control Bus Interface will record the source of events which can  
cause interrupts in a traceable manner.  
Note: SB2 and EB2 are only effective for the DP83257.  
D5 RES  
D6 EB2  
RESERVED: Reserved for future use. The reserved bit is set to 0 during the initialization process  
E
e
(i.e. RST GND).  
a
Note: Users are discouraged from using this bit. It may be set or cleared without any effects to the functionality of the PLAYER device.  
ENABLE BIT2: The Enable Bit 2 allows control of external logic through the Control Bus Interface. The User  
Definable Enable Pin 2 (EP2) is asserted/deasserted by this bit.  
Note: SB2 and EB2 are only effective for the DP83257.  
e
EP2 is deasserted (i.e. EP2 GND).  
0:  
1:  
e
EP2 is asserted (i.e. EP2  
V
CC  
).  
D7 RES  
RESERVED: Reserved for future use. The reserved bit is set to 0 during the initialization process  
E
e
(i.e. RST GND).  
a
Note: Users are discouraged from using this bit. It may be set or cleared without any effects to the functionality of the PLAYER device.  
68  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.25 DEVICE ID REGISTER (IDR)  
The Device ID Register contains the binary equivalent of the revision number for this device. It can be used to ensure proper  
software and hardware versions are matched.  
During a Control Bus Interface write cycle, the Control Bus Write Command Register bit (CCR) of the Interrupt Condition  
Register (ICR) will be set to 1, and will ignore write cycle.  
REVISION TABLE  
IDR  
DEVICE DESCRIPTION  
(hex)  
a
PLAYER Revision A  
a
PLAYER Revision B  
10  
11  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
18h  
Always  
Write Reject  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
DID7  
DID6  
DID5  
DID4  
DID3  
DID2  
DID1  
DID0  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
k
l
D0D3 DID0DID3 DEVICE ID BIT 0-3 : Circuit enhancement revision number. Bit 3 is the MSB. The initial revision of the  
a
PLAYER is equal to 0 and enhancements will increment this number.  
k
l
D4D7 DID4DID7 DEVICE ID BIT 4-7 : Architecture level of the PHY device. Bit 7 is the MSB. The original PLAYER  
device was equal to 0 and the PLAYER is equal to 1. This number will only be incremented after a  
a
significant architectural change.  
69  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.26 CURRENT INJECTION COUNT REGISTER (CIJCR)  
The Current Injection Count Register takes a snap-shot of the Injection Counter during every Control Bus Interface read cycle of  
this register.  
During a Control Bus Interface write cycle, the Control Bus Write Command Reject bit (CCR) of the Interrupt Condition Register  
(ICR) will be set to 1 and will ignore a write cycle.  
The Injection Counter is an 8-bit down-counter which decrements every 80 ns.  
k
l
k
l
The counter is active only during One Shot or Periodic Injection Modes (i.e. Injection Control 1:0 bits (IC 1:0 ) of the  
Current Transmit State Register (CTSR) are set to either 01 or 10).  
The Injection Threshold Register (IJTR) value is loaded into the Injection Counter when the counter reaches zero and during  
every Control Bus Interface write cycle of IJTR.  
E
e
The counter is initialized to 0 during the reset process (i.e. RST GND).  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
19h  
Always  
Write Reject  
D7  
D6  
D5  
IJC5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
IJC7  
IJC6  
IJC4  
IJC3  
IJC2  
IJC1  
IJC0  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
k
l
D0D7 IJC0IJC7 INJECTION COUNT BIT 0-7 : Current value of the Injection Counter.  
IJC0 is the Least Significant Bit (LSB).  
70  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.27 INTERRUPT CONDITION COMPARISON REGISTER (ICCR)  
a
The Interrupt Condition Comparison Register ensures that the Control Bus must first read a bit modified by the PLAYER  
device before it can be written to by the Control Bus Interface.  
The current state of the Interrupt Condition Register (ICR) is automatically written into the Interrupt Condition Comparison  
e
Register (i.e. ICCR ICR) during a Control Bus Interface read-cycle of ICR.  
a
During a Control Bus Interface write cycle, the PLAYER device will set the Conditional Write Inhibit bit (CWI) of the Interrupt  
Condition Register (ICR) to 1 and disallow the setting or clearing of a bit within ICR when the value of a bit in ICR differs from the  
value of the corresponding bit in the interrupt Condition Comparison Register.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
1Ah  
Always  
Always  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
LEMTC  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
UDIC  
RCBC  
RCAC  
CWIC  
CCRC  
CPEC  
DPEC  
Bit Symbol  
Description  
D0 DPEC  
PHY REQUEST DATA PARITY ERROR COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the PHY Request Data Parity  
Ð Ð  
Error bit (DPE) of the Interrupt Condition Register (ICR).  
D1 CPEC  
D2 CCRC  
D3 CWIC  
D4 LEMTC  
D5 RCAC  
D6 RCBC  
D7 UDIC  
CONTROL BUS DATA PARITY ERROR COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Control Bus Data Parity Error  
bit (CPE) of the Interrupt Condition Register (ICR).  
CONTROL BUS WRITE COMMAND REJECT COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Control Bus Write  
Command Reject bit (CCR) of the Interrupt Condition Register (ICR).  
CONDITIONAL WRITE INHIBIT COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Conditional Write Inhibit bit (CWI) of  
the Interrupt Condition Register (ICR).  
LINK ERROR MONITOR THRESHOLD COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Link Error Monitor Threshold  
bit (LEMT) of the Interrupt Condition Register (ICR).  
RECEIVE CONDITION A COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Receive Condition A bit (RCA) of the  
Interrupt Condition Register (ICR).  
RECEIVE CONDITION B COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Receive Condition B bit (RCB) of the  
Interrupt Condition Register (ICR).  
USER DEFINABLE INTERRUPT COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the User Definable Interrupt bit (UDIC) of  
the Interrupt Condition Register (ICR).  
71  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.28 CURRENT TRANSMIT STATE COMPARISON REGISTER (CTSCR)  
a
The Current Transmit State Comparison Register ensures that the Control Bus must first read a bit modified by the PLAYER  
device before it can be written to by the Control Bus Interface.  
The current state of the Current Transmit State Register (CTSR) is automatically written into the Current Transmit State  
e
Comparison Register A (i.e. CTSCR CTSR) during a Control Bus Interface read cycle of CTSR.  
a
During a Control Bus Interface write cycle, the PLAYER device will set the Conditional Write Inhibit bit (CWI) of the Interrupt  
Condition Register (ICR) to 1 and disallow the setting or clearing of a bit within the CTSR when the value of a bit in the CTSR  
differs from the value of the corresponding bit in the Current Transmit State Comparison Register.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
1Bh  
Always  
Always  
D7  
D6  
D5  
SEC  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
RESC  
PRDPEC  
IC1C  
IC0C  
TM2C  
TM1C  
TM0C  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
k
Current Transmit State Register (CTSR).  
l
k
k
k
l
l
l
D0 TM0C  
D1 TM1C  
D2 TM2C  
D3 IC0C  
D4 IC1C  
D5 SEC  
TRANSMIT MODE  
0
COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Transmit Mode  
0
1
2
bit (TM0) of the  
bit (TM1) of the  
bit (TM2) of the  
k
Current Transmit State Register (CTSR).  
l
COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Transmit Mode  
TRANSMIT MODE  
1
k
Current Transmit State Register (CTSR).  
l
COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Transmit Mode  
TRANSMIT MODE  
2
k
Current Transmit State Register (CTSR).  
l
k
k
l
l
INJECTION CONTROL  
0
COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Injection Control  
0
1
bit (IC0) of the  
bit (IC1) of the  
k
Current Transmit State Register (CTSR).  
l
COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Injection Control  
INJECTION CONTROL  
1
SMOOTHER ENABLE COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Smoother Enable bit (SE) of the Current  
Transmit State Register (CTSR).  
D6 PRDPEC PHY REQUEST DATA PARITY ENABLE COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the PHY Request Data  
Ð
Ð
Parity Enable bit (PRDPE) of the Current Transmit State Register (CTSR).  
D7 RESC  
RESERVED COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Reserved bit (RES) of the Current Transmit State  
Register (CTSR).  
72  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.29 RECEIVE CONDITION COMPARISON REGISTER A (RCCRA)  
a
The Receive Condition Comparison Register A ensures that the Control Bus must first read a bit modified by the PLAYER  
device before it can be written to by the Control Bus Interface.  
e
The current state of RCRA is automatically written into the Receive Condition Comparison Register A (i.e. RCCRA RCRA)  
during a Control Bus Interface read cycle of RCRA.  
a
During a Control Bus Interface write cycle, the PLAYER device will set the Conditional Write Inhibit bit (CWI) of the Interrupt  
Condition Register (ICR) to 1 and prevent the setting or clearing of a bit within RCRA when the value of a bit in RCRA differs  
from the value of the corresponding bit in the Receive Condition Comparison Register A.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
1Ch  
Always  
Always  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
LSUPIC  
LSCC  
NTC  
NLSC  
MLSC  
HLSC  
QLSC  
NSDC  
Bit Symbol  
Description  
D0 NSDC  
NO SIGNAL DETECT COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the No Signal Detect bit (NSD) of the Receive  
Condition Register A (RCRA).  
D1 QLSC  
D2 HLSC  
D3 MLSC  
D4 NLSC  
D5 NTC  
QUIET LINE STATE COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Quiet Line State bit (QLS) of the Receive  
Condition Register A (RCRA).  
HALT LINE STATE COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Halt Line State bit (HLS) of the Receive Condition  
Register A (RCRA).  
MASTER LINE STATE COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Master Line State bit (MLS) of the Receive  
Condition Register A (RCRA).  
NOISE LINE STATE COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Noise Line State bit (NLS) of the Receive  
Condition Register A (RCRA).  
NOISE THRESHOLD COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Noise Threshold bit (NT) of the Receive  
Condition Register A (RCRA).  
D6 LSCC  
LINE STATE CHANGE COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Line State Change bit (LSC) of the Receive  
Condition Register A (RCRA).  
D7 LSUPIC LINE STATE UNKNOWN AND PHY INVALID COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Line State Unknown  
and PHY Invalid bit (LSUPI) of the Receive Condition Register A (RCRA).  
73  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.30 RECEIVE CONDITION COMPARISION REGISTER B (RCCRB)  
a
The Receive Condition Comparison Register B ensures that the Control Bus must first read a bit modified by the PLAYER  
device before it can be written to by the Control Bus Interface.  
e
The current state of RCRB is automatically written into the Receive Condition Comparison Register B (i.e. RCCRB RCRB)  
during a Control Bus Interface read cycle RCRB.  
a
During a Control Bus Interface write cycle, the PLAYER device will set the Conditional Write Inhibit bit (CWI) of the Interrupt  
Condition Register (ICR) to 1 and prevent the setting or clearing of a bit within RCRB when the value of a bit in RCRB differs  
from the value of the corresponding bit in the Receive Condition Comparison Register B.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
1Dh  
Always  
Always  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
CSEC  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
RESC  
SILSC  
EBOUC  
LSUPVC  
ALSC  
STC  
ILSC  
Bit Symbol  
Description  
D0 ILSC  
IDLE LINE STATE COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Idle Line State bit (ILS) of the Receive Condition  
Register B (RCRB).  
D1 STC  
STATE THRESHOLD COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the State Threshold bit (ST) of the Receive  
Condition Register B (RCRB).  
D2 ALSC  
ACTIVE LINE STATE COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Active Line State bit (ALS) of the Receive  
Condition Register B (RCRB).  
D3 LSUPVC LINE STATE UNKNOWN AND PHY VALID COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Line State Unknown and  
PHY Valid bit (LSUPV) of the Receive Condition Register B (RCRB).  
D4 CSEC  
CONNECTION SERVICE EVENT COMPARISON / CASCADE SYNCHRONIZATION ERROR: The comparison  
bit for the Cascade Synchronization Error/Connection Service Event bit (CSE) of the Receive Condition Register  
B (RCRB).  
D5 EBOUC  
D6 SILSC  
D7 RESC  
ELASTICITY BUFFER OVERFLOW / UNDERFLOW COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Elasticity Buffer  
Overflow/Underflow bit (EBOU) of the Receive Condition Register B (RCRB).  
SUPER IDLE LINE STATE COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Super Idle Line State bit (SILS) of the  
Receive Condition Register B (RCRB).  
RESERVED COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Reserved bit (RES) of the Receive Condition Register B  
(RCRB).  
74  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.31 MODE REGISTER 2 (MODE2)  
a
The Mode Register 2 (MODE2) is used to configure the PLAYER device.  
The register is used to software reset the chip, setup data parity, and enable scrubbing functions.  
Note: This register can not be written to during reset.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
1Eh  
Always  
Conditional  
D7  
D6  
D5  
CLKSEL  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
ESTC  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
CBPE  
PHYRST  
Bit  
D0  
Symbol  
Description  
PHYRST PLAYER RESET: This bit can be used as a master software reset of the PLAYER function within the  
a
PLAYER device. The clock distribution and recovery sections of the chip are not affected by this reset.  
a
The PLAYER automatically clears this bit 32 byte time after its assertion to indicate that the reset action  
has been completed.  
a
This bit can be set through a C-Bus write, but can only be cleared by the PLAYER  
.
D1  
CBPE  
C-Bus Parity Enable: This bit disables or enables parity checking on C-Bus data. When this bit is set to 0, no  
parity checking is done. When the bit is set to 1, parity checking is enabled during a C-Bus write cycle. Should  
a mismatch occur, the C-Bus Data Parity Error (ICR.CPE) bit will be set and the corresponding C-Bus access  
is discarded.  
C-Bus data parity is always generated during a C-Bus read cycle.  
D2D4 RES  
RESERVED: Reserved for future use.  
D5  
CLKSEL CLOCK SELECT: This bit controls the frequency of the CLK16 output. It resets to 0 which sets the CLK16  
output to a 15.625 MHz frequency. When set to 1 a 31.25 MHz frequency is generated.  
Note: When the value of this bit is changed, no glitches appear on the CLK16 output due to the frequency change.  
D6  
D7  
RES  
RESERVED: Reserved for future use.  
ESTC  
ENABLE SCRUBBING on TRIGGER CONDITIONS: When ESTC is set to 1 and a Trigger Condition occurs  
(as set in the TDR register), the Trigger Transition Configuration Register (TTCR) is loaded into the  
Configuration Register (CR) and scrubbing is started on all indicate ports that have changed.  
Scrubbing is accomplished by sending out 2 Phy Invalid symbols followed by ‘‘scrub’’symbol pairs for a time  
Ð
defined by the Scrub Timer Threshold register.  
75  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.32 CMT CONDITION COMPARISON REGISTER (CMTCCR)  
a
The CMT Condition Comparison Register (CMTCR) ensures that the Control Bus must first read a bit modified by the PLAYER  
device before it can be written to by the Control Bus Interface.  
The current state of the CMT Condition Register (CMTCR) is automatically written into the CMT Condition Comparison Register  
e
(CMTCR) (i.e. CMTCCR  
CMTCR) during a Control Bus Interface read-cycle of CMTCR.  
a
During a Control Bus Interface write cycle, the PLAYER device will set the Conditional Write Inhibit bit (CWI) of the Interrupt  
Control Register (ICR) to 1 and disallow the setting or clearing of a bit within the CMTCR when the value of a bit in the CMTCR  
differs from the value of the corresponding bit in the CMT Condition Comparison Register.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
1Fh  
Always  
Always  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
RES  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
TCOC  
STEC  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
D0-D5 RES  
RESERVED: Reserved for future use.  
D6  
D7  
STEC  
TCOC  
SCRUB TIMER EXPIRED COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Scrub Timer Expire bit (STE) of the CMT  
Condition Register (CMTCR).  
TRIGGER CONDITION OCCURRED COMPARISON: The comparison bit for the Trigger Condition Occurred  
(TCO) bit of the CMT Condition Register (CMTCR).  
76  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.33 CMT CONDITION REGISTER (CMTCR)  
The CMT Condition Register maintains a history of all CMT events and actions performed. The corresponding CMT Condition  
Mask Register (CMTCMR) can be used to generate an interrupt. When the bits in both the CMTCMR and CMTCR are set, the  
Receive Condition Register B’s Connection Service Event (RCRB.CSE) bit will be set.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
20h  
Always  
Conditional  
D7  
D6  
D5  
RES  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
TCO  
STE  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
D0-D5 RES  
RESERVED: Reserved for future use.  
D6  
STE  
SCRUB TIMER EXPIRED: This bit is set to 1 when the Scrub Timer expires.  
Note: When STE is set, the Configuration Register (CR) is protected.  
D7  
TCO  
TRIGGER CONDITION OCCURRED: This bit is set to 1 when a trigger condition is met. When a trigger occurs,  
the values in the Trigger Transmit Mode (TDR.TTM2-0) are loaded into the Current Transmit Mode Register  
(CTSR.TM2-0).  
Note: When TCO is set, the Current Transmit State Register (CTSR) is protected.  
77  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.34 CMT CONDITION MASK REGISTER (CMTCMR)  
This is the mask register for the CMT Condition Register (CMTCR). When the bits in both the CMTCMR and CMTCR are set, the  
Receive Condition Register B’s Connection Service Event (RCRB.CSE) bit will be set.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
21h  
Always  
Always  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
RES  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
TCOM  
STEM  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
D0-D5 RES  
RESERVED: Reserved for future use.  
D6  
D7  
STEM  
SCRUB TIMER EXPIRED MASK: The mask bit for the Scrub Timer Expired (STE) bit of the CMT Condition  
Register (CMTCR).  
TCOM  
TRIGGER CONDITION OCCURRED MASK: The mask bit for the Trigger Condition Occurred (TCO) bit of the  
CMT Condition Register (CMTCR).  
78  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.35 RESERVED REGISTERS 22H23H (RR22HRR23H)  
This register is reserved for future use.  
DO NOT ACCESS THIS REGISTER  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
22h23h  
Always  
DO NOT WRITE  
79  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.36 SCRUB TIMER THRESHOLD REGISTER (STTR)  
E
This is the threshold value of the internal scrub timer. It has a resolution of 40.96 ms and a maximum value of 10 ms. When  
the scrub timer reaches zero, the Scrub Timer Expired (CMTCR.STE) bit is set.  
e
Scrubbing is initiated when MODE2.ESTC 1 and a trigger condition occurs.  
Writing to STTR during scrubbing will not affect the scrubbing action.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
24h  
Always  
Always  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
STT4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
STT7  
STT6  
STT5  
STT3  
STT2  
STT1  
STT0  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
k
l
D0D7 STT0STT7 SCRUB TIMER THRESHOLD BIT 0-7 : Scrub Timer threshold.  
STT0 is the Least Significant Bit (LSB).  
80  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.37 SCRUB TIMER VALUE REGISTER (STVR)  
This is a snap-shot of the current value of the upper 8 bits of the scrub timer.  
During a Control Bus Interface write cycle, the Control Bus Write Command Reject bit (CCR) of the Interrupt Condition Register  
(ICR) will be set to 1 and will ignore a write cycle.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
25h  
Always  
Write Reject  
D7  
D6  
D5  
STV5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
STV7  
STV6  
STV4  
STV3  
STV2  
STV1  
STV0  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
k
l
D0D7 STV0STV7 SCRUB TIMER VALUE BIT 0-7 : Snap-shot of the scrub timer.  
STV0 is the Least Significant Bit (LSB).  
81  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.38 TRIGGER DEFINITION REGISTER (TDR)  
This register determines which events cause a trigger transition and which transmit mode is entered when a trigger transition is  
detected. The trigger transmit modes are the same as those found in the Current Transmit State Register (CTSR), and are  
loaded from the TDR into the CTSR when any of the selected trigger conditions occur. When a trigger condition occurs  
CMTCR.TCO is set.  
The Trigger Definition Register is useful to implement the strict PC React time requirement.  
Ð
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
26h  
Always  
Always  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
TOMLS  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
TONT  
TOQLS  
TOHLS  
TOSILS  
TTM2  
TTM1  
TTM0  
Bit Symbol  
Description  
k
l
D0, TTM0,  
D1, TTM1,  
TRIGGER TRANSMIT MODE 0, 1, 2 : These bits select one of 6 transmission modes to be loaded into the  
Current Transmit State Register (CTSR) when a trigger condition is detected. The trigger condition is selected by  
the upper 5 bits of this register.  
D2  
TTM2  
TTM2 TTM1 TTM0  
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
Active Transmit Mode (ATM): Normal transmission of incoming PHY Request data.  
Idle Transmit Mode (ITM): Transmission of Idle symbol pairs (11111 11111).  
Off Transmit Mode (OTM): Transmission of Quiet symbol pairs (00000 00000) and  
deassertion of the PMD transmitter Enable pin (TXE).  
0
1
1
0
1
0
Reserved: Reserved for future use. Users are discouraged from using this transmit  
mode. If selected, however, the transmitter will generate Quiet symbol pairs  
(00000 00000).  
Master Transmit Mode (MTM): Transmission of Halt and Quiet symbol pairs  
(00100 00000).  
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
Halt Transmit Mode (HTM): Transmission of Halt symbol pairs (00100 00100).  
Quiet Transmit Mode (QTM): Transmission of Quiet symbol pairs (00000 00000).  
Reserved: Reserved for future use. Users are discouraged from using this transmit  
mode. If selected, however, the transmitter will generate Quiet symbol pairs  
(00000 00000).  
D3  
D4  
D5  
D6  
D7  
TOSILS TRIGGER ON SILS: Trigger when SILS is received.  
TOMLS TRIGGER ON MLS: Trigger when MLS is received.  
TOHLS  
TOQLS  
TONT  
TRIGGER ON HLS: Trigger when HLS is received.  
TRIGGER ON QLS (or NSD): Trigger when QLS is received.  
e
TRIGGER ON Noise Threshold: Trigger when Noise Threshold is reached (Current Noise Register 0).  
82  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.39 TRIGGER TRANSITION CONFIGURATION REGISTER (TTCR)  
The Trigger Transition Configuration Register holds the configuration switch setting to be loaded into the Configuration Register  
(CR) when a trigger transition takes place. When scrubbing is enabled, scrubbing is performed for a period of time indicated by  
the Scrub Timer Threshold Register (STTR).The register bit descriptions for the Configuration Register and, therefore, the  
Trigger Transition Configuration Register are reprinted below.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
27h  
Always  
Always  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
TRS0  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
BIE  
AIE  
TRS1  
BIS1  
BIS0  
AIS1  
AIS0  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
k l k l  
A INDICATE SELECTOR 0, 1 : The A Indicate Selector 0, 1 bits selects one of the four  
Ð Ð  
D0, D1 AIS0, AIS1  
k
l
Configuration Switch data buses for the A Indicate output port (AIP, AIC, AID 7:0 ).  
Ð
AIS1  
AIS0  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
PHY Invalid Bus  
Receiver Bus  
A
B
Request Bus  
Request Bus  
Ð
Ð
k l k l  
B INDICATE SELECTOR 0, 1 : The B Indicate Selector 0, 1 bits selects one of the four  
Ð Ð  
D2, D3 BIS0, BIS1  
k
l
Configuration Switch data buses for the B Indicate output port (BIP, BIC, BID 7:0 ).  
Ð
BIS1  
BIS0  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
PHY Invalid Bus  
Receiver  
A
B
Request Bus  
Request Bus  
Ð
Ð
Note: Even though this bit can be set and/or cleared in the DP83256 (for single path stations), it will not affect any I/Os since the  
DP83256 does not offer a B Indicate port.  
Ð
k
l
k
l
D4, D5 TRS0, TRS1 TRANSMIT REQUEST SELECTOR 0, 1 : The Transmit Request Selector 0, 1 bits selects one of  
the four Configuration Switch data buses for the input to the Transmitter Block.  
TRS1 TRS0  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
PHY Invalid Bus  
Receiver Bus  
A
B
Request Bus  
Request Bus  
Ð
Ð
k
l
Note: If the PLAYER device is in Active Transmit Mode (i.e. the Transmit Mode bits (TM 2:0 ) of the Current Transmit State  
a
Register (CTSR) are set to 00) and the PHY Invalid Bus is selected, then the PLAYER device will transmit continuous Idle  
a
symbols due to the Repeat Filter.  
D6  
D7  
AIE  
BIE  
A
INDICATE ENABLE:  
Ð
0: Disables the A Indicate output port. The A Indicate port pins will be tri-stated when the port is  
Ð
Ð
disabled.  
k
l
1: Enables the A Indicate output port (AIP, AIC, AID 7:0 ).  
Ð
B
INDICATE ENABLE:  
Ð
0: Disables the B Indicate output port. The B Indicate port pins will be tri-stated when the port is  
Ð
Ð
disabled.  
k
l
1: Enables the B Indicate output port (BIP, BIC, BID 7:0 ).  
Ð
Note: Even though this bit can be set and/or cleared in the DP83256 (for single path stations), it will not affect any I/Os since the  
DP83256 does not offer a B Indicate port.  
Ð
83  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.40 RESERVED REGISTERS 28H-3AH (RR28H-RR3AH)  
These registers are reserved for future use.  
DO NOT ACCESS THESE REGISTERS  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
28h3Ah  
Always  
DO NOT WRITE  
84  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.41 CLOCK GENERATION MODULE REGISTER (CGMREG)  
This register is used to enable or disable the 125 MHz ECL Transmit clock outputs. These outputs are not required for use in a  
standard FDDI board implementation and are disabled by default to reduce high frequency noise.  
These TXC outputs are included for support of alternate FDDI PMDs, such as unshielded twisted pair copper cable.  
DO NOT WRITE TO RESERVED REGISTER BITS. Writes to reserved register bits could prevent proper device operation.  
Therefore, read the register first, and then write it back with the non-reserved bits set to the desired value.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
3Bh  
Always  
Always  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
RES  
RES  
FLTREN  
RES  
TXCE  
RES  
RES  
RES  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
D0-D2 RES  
RESERVED BITS: DO NOT CHANGE THE VALUE OF THESE BITS. Changes to reserved register bits could  
prevent proper device operation.  
D3  
TXCE  
RES  
TRANSMIT CLOCK ENABLE: When bit is set to 1, 125 MHz ECL TXC outputs are enabled. When this bit is  
reset to 0, TXC outputs are disabled. TXC outputs are disabled on reset.  
a
Note: TXC clocks are only available on the 160-pin DP83257 PLAYER device.  
D4  
D5  
RESERVED BITS: DO NOT CHANGE THE VALUE OF THESE BITS. Changes to reserved register bits could  
prevent proper device operation.  
FLTREN FILTER ENABLE: When bit is set to 1, the internal loop filter node is connected to the LPFLTR pin for  
diagnostic viewing. This bit is reset to 0 by default, which disconnects the filter node from the LPFLTR pin.  
e
Note: In normal operation this bit should be disabled ( 0).  
D6-D7 RES  
RESERVED BITS: DO NOT CHANGE THE VALUE OF THESE BITS. Changes to reserved register bits could  
prevent proper device operation.  
85  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.42 ALTERNATE PMD REGISTER (APMDREG)  
This register is used to enable or disable the Alternate PMD inputs and ouputs. These signals are not required for use in FDDI  
a
board implementations that do not require a scrambler that is external to the PLAYER device. The actual interface consists of  
the signal pairs RXC OUT, RXD OUT, RXC IN, and RXD IN.  
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
The interface is disabled by default and should only be enabled if it is being used. Note that Long Internal Loopback should not  
be used when the Alternate PMD Interface is enabled.  
DO NOT WRITE TO RESERVED REGISTER BITS. Writes to reserved register bits could prevent proper device operation.  
Therefore, read the register first, and then write it back with the non-reserved bits set to the desired value.  
a
Note: The Alternate PMD Interface pins are only available on the 100-pin DP83256-AP and 160-pin DP83257 PLAYER devices. The Alternate PMD Interface is  
disabled on reset.  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
3Ch  
Always  
Always  
D7  
D6  
D5  
D4  
RES  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
RES  
RES  
RES  
APMDEN  
RES  
RES  
RES  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
D0D2 RES  
RESERVED BITS: DO NOT CHANGE THE VALUE OF THESE BITS. Changes to reserved register bits could  
prevent proper device operation.  
D3  
APMDEN ALTERNATE PMD ENABLE: When bit is set to 1, the Alternate PMD Interface is enabled. When this bit is  
reset to 0, the Alternate PMD Interface is disabled.  
The Alternate PMD Interface consists of the following extra ECL signal pairs  
RXC OUT, RXD OUT, RXC IN, and RXD IN.  
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
In some alternate PMD implementations it may also be necessary to use the 125 MHz Transmit Clock  
signals (TXC). The TXC outputs must be separately enabled by the TXCE bit in the CGMREG register.  
a
Note: The Alternate PMD Interface pins are only available on the 100-pin DP83256-AP and 160-pin DP83257 PLAYER devices. The  
Alternate PMD Interface is disabled on reset.  
D4D7 RES  
RESERVED BITS: DO NOT CHANGE THE VALUE OF THESE BITS. Changes to reserved register bits could  
prevent proper device operation.  
86  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.43 GAIN REGISTER (GAINREG)  
The Gain Register contains the settings for the CGM’s on-chip programmable loop filter. For optimal jitter performance on the  
a
revision A and B PLAYER device’s Filter Position 4 should be used. The user should check that the IDR register is equal to  
revision A or B (10h or 11h) before changing the filter setting as later revisions will default to the correct setting which may be a  
different filter position number.  
Pseudo Code Programming Example:  
Care must be taken when changing the settings of the on-chip programmable loop filter. The filter should only be set to the  
recommended value and the additional bits in the Gain Register must not be altered. Alteration of the reserved bits in the Gain  
a
Register may result in improper PLAYER device operation.  
The following pseudo code outlines the proper procedure for setting the Gain Register loop filter settings to the correct value.  
// Register names and constants are all in UPPERCASE  
//  
//  
#define REV B 0x11  
#define REV A 0x10  
#define LOOP MASK 0x1F  
#define NEW LOOP 0x40  
k
À
4 REV B)  
if (IDR  
temp 4 GAIN REG  
temp 4 temp & LOOP MASK  
temp 4 temp NEW LOOP  
l
GAIN REG 4 temp  
Ó
À
else Do Nothing  
Ó
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
3Dh  
Always  
Always  
D7  
D6  
FILT1  
D5  
D4  
RES  
D3  
D2  
D1  
D0  
FILT2  
FILT0  
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
Bit  
Symbol  
Description  
D0D4  
RES  
RESERVED: Do not alter these bits. The device may cease to operate properly if these bits are  
changed.  
k
l
k
FILTER SELECTION 0, 1, 2 : The Filter Selection 0, 1, 2 bits select one of five on-chip CGM  
l
FILT0,  
FILT1,  
FILT2  
D5D7  
loop filters.  
Note: Filter combinations that are not specified or recommended should not be used and may result in non-optimal device  
performance.  
FILT2  
FILT1  
FILT0  
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
FP0: Filter Position 0.  
FP1: Filter Position 1.  
FP2: Filter Position 2. This is the filter selected after reset on the  
a
revision A and B PLAYER devices.  
0
0
0
1
1
0
FP3: Filter Position 3.  
FP4: Filter Position 4. This is the recommended filter position for  
a
the revision A and B PLAYER devices.  
87  
5.0 Registers (Continued)  
5.44 RESERVED REGISTERS 3EH-3FH (RR3EH-RR3FH)  
These registers are reserved for future use.  
DO NOT ACCESS THESE REGISTERS  
ACCESS RULES  
ADDRESS  
READ  
WRITE  
3Eh3Fh  
Always  
DO NOT WRITE  
88  
6.0 Signal Descriptions  
6.1 DP83256VF PIN DESCRIPTIONS  
The pin descriptions for the DP83256VF are divided into 5 functional interfaces: PMD Interface, PHY Port Interface, Control Bus  
Interface, Clock Interface, and Miscellaneous Interface.  
For a Pinout Summary list, refer to Table 8-1 and Figure 8-1, DP83256VF 100-Pin JEDEC Metric PQFP Pinout.  
PMD INTERFACE  
a
The PMD Interface consists of I/O signals used to connect the PLAYER device to the Physical Medium Dependant (PMD)  
sublayer.  
Ý
Symbol Pin  
I/O  
Description  
a
b
PMID  
PMID  
39  
I
PMD Indicate Data: Differential, 100k ECL, 125 Mbps serial data input signals from the PMD receiver.  
38  
a
b
PMRD  
PMRD  
33  
32  
O
I
PMD Request Data: Differential, 100k ECL, 125 Mbps serial data output signals to the PMD transmitter.  
a
b
SD  
SD  
37  
36  
Signal Detect: Differential 100k ECL input signals from the PMD receiver indicating that a signal is being  
received by the PMD receiver.  
TEL  
47  
I
PMD Transmitter Enable Level: A TTL input signal to select the PMD transmitter Enable (TXE) signal  
level.  
TXE  
46  
O
PMD Transmitter Enable: A TTL output signal to enable/disable the PMD transmitter. The output level  
of the TXE pin is determined by three parameters: the Transmit Enable (TE) bit in the Mode Register, the  
TM2-TM0 bits in the Current Transmit State Register, and the input to the TEL pin. The following rules  
summarize the output of the TXE pin:  
e
e
e
1. If TE 0 and TEL GND, then TXE V  
CC  
e
e
e
e
, then TXE GND  
2. If TE 0 and TEL  
V
CC  
e
3. If TE 1 and OTM and TEL GND, then TXE V  
e
e
CC  
, then TXE GND  
e
e
5. If TE 1 and not OTM and TEL GND, then TXE GND  
4. If TE 1 and OTM and TEL  
V
CC  
e
e
e
e
6. If TE 1 and not OTM and TEL  
e
e
V , then TXE V  
CC CC  
89  
6.0 Signal Descriptions (Continued)  
PHY PORT INTERFACE  
a
The PHY Port Interface consists of I/O signals used to connect the PLAYER device to the Media Access Control (MAC)  
sublayer or other PLAYER device. The DP83256 Device has two PHY Port Interfaces. The A Indicate path from one PHY  
a
Ð
Port Interface and the B Request path from the second PHY Port Interface. Each path consists of an odd parity bit, a control  
Ð
bit, and two 4-bit symbols.  
Refer to section 3.3, the Configuration Switch, for more information.  
Ý
Symbol Pin  
I/O  
Description  
AIP  
6
O
PHY Port A Indicate Parity: A TTL output signal representing odd parity for the 10-bit wide Port A  
k
l
Indicate signals (AIP, AIC, and AID 7:0 ).  
k
l
PHY Port A Indicate Control: TTL output signal indicating that the two 4-bit symbols (AID 7:4 and  
AIC  
7
O
O
k
l
AID 3:0 ) are either control symbols (AIC 1) or data symbols (AIC 0).  
e
e
AID7  
AID6  
AID5  
AID4  
8
9
PHY Port A Indicate Data: TTL output signals representing the first 4-bit data/control symbol.  
AID7 is the most significant bit and AID4 is the least significant bit of the first symbol.  
10  
13  
AID3  
AID2  
AID1  
AID0  
14  
15  
16  
17  
O
PHY Port A Indicate Data: TTL output signals representing the second 4-bit data/control symbol.  
AID3 is the most significant bit and AID0 is the least significant bit of the second symbol.  
BRP  
70  
I
I
PHY Port B Request Parity: A TTL input signal representing odd parity for the 10-bit wide Port A  
k
l
Request signals (BRP, BRC, and BRD 7:0 ).  
BRC  
69  
PHY Port B Request Control: A TTL input signal indicating that the two 4-bit symbols  
k
l
k
l
e
e
(BRD 7:4 and BRD 3:0 ) are either control symbols (BRC 1) or data symbols (BRC 0).  
PHY Port B Request Data: TTL input signals representing the first 4-bit data/control symbol.  
BRD7 is the most significant bit and BRD4 is the least significant bit of the first symbol.  
BRD7  
BRD6  
BRD5  
BRD4  
68  
67  
66  
63  
I
I
BRD3  
BRD2  
BRD1  
BRD0  
62  
61  
60  
59  
PHY Port B Request Data: TTL input signals representing the second 4-bit data/control symbol.  
BRD3 is the most significant bit and BRD0 is the least significant bit of the second symbol.  
90  
6.0 Signal Descriptions (Continued)  
CONTROL BUS INTERFACE  
a
The Control Bus Interface consists of I/O signals used to connect the PLAYER device to Station Management (SMT).  
a
The Control Bus is an asynchronous interface between the PLAYER device and a general purpose microprocessor or other  
controller. It provides access to 64 8-bit internal registers.  
a
In the PLAYER device the Control Bus address range has been expanded by 1-bit to 6 bits of address space.  
Ý
Symbol Pin  
I/O  
Description  
E
CE  
73  
I
Control Enable: An active-low, TTL, input signal which enables the Control Bus port for a read or write  
k
l
k
cycle. R/ W, CBA 5:0 , CBP, and CBD 7:0 must be valid at the time CE is low.  
l
E
E
E
E
Read/ Write: A TTL input signal which indicates a read Control Bus cycle(R/  
Control Bus cycle (R/  
E
e
W 1), or a write  
R/  
W
72  
I
E
e
0).  
W
E
E
or write cycle. During a read cycle, CBD 7:0 are valid as long as ACK is low ( ACK 0). During a  
ACK  
75  
O
Acknowledge: An active low, TTL, open drain output signal which indicates the completion of a read  
l
k
write cycle, a microprocessor must hold CBD 7:0 valid until ACK becomes low. Once ACK is low,  
E
E
e
k
l
it will remain low as long as CE remains low ( CE 0).  
E
E
E
E
e
E
E
INT  
74  
O
I
Interrupt: An active low, open drain, TTL, output signal indicating that an interrupt condition has  
occurred. The Interrupt Condition Register (ICR) should be read in order to find out the source of the  
interrupt. Interrupts can be masked through the use of the Interrupt Condition Mask Register (ICMR).  
CBA5  
CBA4  
CBA3  
CBA2  
CBA1  
CBA0  
83  
82  
81  
80  
77  
76  
Control Bus Address: TTL input signals used to select the address of the register to be read or written.  
CBA5 is the most significant bit (MSB) and CBA0 is the least significant bit (LSB) of the address signals.  
CBP  
96  
I/O Control Bus Parity: A bidirectional, TTL signal representing odd parity for the Control Bus data  
k
l
(CBD 7:0 ).  
a
E
During a read cycle, the signal is held valid by the PLAYER device as long as ACK is low.  
E
E
During a write cycle, the signal must be valid when CE is low, and must be held valid until ACK  
becomes low. If incorrect parity is used during a write cycle, the PLAYER device will inhibit the write  
a
cycle and set the Control Bus Data Parity Error (CPE) bit in the Interrupt Condition Register (ICR).  
CBD7  
CBD6  
CBD5  
CBD4  
CBD3  
CBD2  
CBD1  
CBD0  
95  
94  
93  
92  
91  
90  
89  
86  
I/O Control Bus Data: Bidirectional, TTL signals containing the data to be read from or written to a register.  
a
E
During a read cycle, the signal is held valid by the PLAYER device as long as ACK is low.  
E
E
During a write cycle, the signal must be valid when CE is low, and must be held valid until ACK  
becomes low.  
91  
6.0 Signal Descriptions (Continued)  
CLOCK INTERFACE  
a
The Clock Interface consists of 12.5 MHz and 25 MHz clocks supplied by the PLAYER device as well as reference and  
feedback inputs.  
Ý
Symbol  
LBC1  
Pin  
I/O  
Description  
4
3
2
1
O
Local Byte Clock: TTL compatible, 12.5 MHz, 50% duty cycle clock outputs which are phase  
locked to a crystal oscillator or reference signal. The PH SEL input determines whether the five  
phase outputs are phase offset by 8 ns or 16 ns.  
LBC2  
LBC3  
LBC4  
LBC5  
Ð
100  
PH SEL  
Ð
22  
25  
99  
5
I
Phase Select: TTL compatible input used to select either a 8 ns or 16 ns phase offset between the 5  
local byte clocks (LBC’s). The LBC’s are phase offset 8ns apart when PH SEL is at a logic LOW  
level and 16 ns apart when at a logic HI level.  
Ð
FBK IN  
Ð
I
Feedback Input: TTL compatible input for use as the PLL’s phase comparator feedback input to  
close the Phase Locked Loop. This input is intended to be driven from one of the Local Byte Clocks  
a
(LBC’s) from the same PLAYER device.  
LSC  
O
O
Local Symbol Clock: TTL compatible 25 MHz output for driving the MACSI or BMAC devices. This  
output’s negative phase transition is aligned with the LBC1 output transitions and has a 40% HI and  
60% LOW duty cycle.  
CLK16  
Clock 16/32: TTL compatible clock with a selectable frequency of approximately 15.625 MHz or  
31.25 MHz. The frequency can be selected using the Clock Select (CLKSEL) bit of the Mode 2  
Register (MODE2).  
Note: No glitches appear at the output when switching frequencies.  
XTAL IN  
Ð
27  
I
External Crystal Oscillator Input: This input in conjunction with the XTAL OUT output, is  
Ð
designed for use of an external crystal oscillator network as the frequency reference for the clock  
generation module’s internal VCO. A diagram of the required circuit, which includes only a 12.5 MHz  
crystal and 2 loading capacitors, is shown inFigure 3-19.  
This input is selected when the REF SEL input is at a logic LOW level. When not being used, this  
Ð
input should be tied to ground.  
XTAL OUT  
Ð
26  
24  
23  
30  
O
I
External Crystal Oscillator Output: This output in conjunction with the XTAL IN input, is designed  
Ð
for use of an external crystal oscillator network as the frequency reference for the clock generation  
module’s internal VCO. A diagram of the required circuit, which includes only a 12.5 MHz crystal and  
2 loading capacitors, is shown inFigure 3-19.  
REF IN  
Ð
Reference Input: TTL compatible input for use as the PLL’s phase comparator reference frequency.  
This input is for use in dual attach station or concentrator configurations where there are multiple  
a
PLAYER devices at a given site requiring synchronization.  
This input is selected when the REF SEL input is at a logic HI level.  
Ð
REF SEL  
Ð
I
Reference Select: TTL compatible input which selects either the crystal oscillator inputs XTAL IN  
Ð
and XTAL OUT or the REF IN inputs as the reference frequency inputs for the PLL.  
Ð Ð  
The crystal oscillator inputs are selected when REF SEL is at a logic LOW level and the REF IN  
Ð
input is selected as the reference when REF SEL is at a logic HI level.  
Ð
Ð
LPFLTR  
O
Loop Filter: This is a diagnostic output that allows monitoring of the clock generation module’s filter  
node. This output is disabled by default and does not need to be connected to any external device. It  
can be enabled using the FLTREN bit of the Clock generation module register (CGMREG).  
Note: In normal operation this pin should be disabled.  
92  
6.0 Signal Descriptions (Continued)  
MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACE  
The Miscellaneous Interface consist of a reset signal, user definable sense signals, and user definable enable signals.  
Ý
Symbol Pin  
I/O  
Description  
E
RST  
71  
I
Reset: An active low, TTL, input signal which clears all registers. The signal must be kept asserted for a  
E
a
minimum amount of time. Once the RST signal is asserted, the PLAYER device should be allowed  
the specified amount of time to reset internal logic. Note that bit zero of the Mode Register will be set to  
zero (i.e. Stop Mode). See section 4.2, Stop Mode of Operation for more information  
SP0  
40  
I
I
User Definable Sense Pin 0: A TTL input signal from a user defined source. Sense Bit 0 (SB0) of the  
User Definable Register (UDR) will be set to one if the signal is asserted for a minimum of 160 ns. Once  
the asserted signal is latched, Sense Bit 0 can only be cleared through the Control Bus Interface, even if  
the signal is deasserted. This ensures that the Control Bus Interface will record the source of events  
which can cause interrupts.  
SP1  
42  
User Definable Sense Pin 1: A TTL input signal from a user defined source. Sense Bit 1 (SB1) of the  
User Definable Register (UDR) will be set to one if the signal is asserted for a minimum of 160 ns. Once  
the asserted signal is latched, Sense Bit 1 can only be cleared through the Control Bus Interface, even if  
the signal is deasserted. This ensures that the Control Bus Interface will record the source of events  
which can cause interrupts.  
EP0  
EP1  
41  
43  
O
O
User Definable Enable Pin 0: A TTL output signal allowing control of external logic through the Control  
Bus Interface. EP0 is asserted/deasserted through Enable Bit 0 (EB0) of the User Definable Register  
(UDR). When Enable Bit 0 is set to zero, EP0 is deasserted. When Enable Bit 0 is set to one, EP0 is  
asserted.  
User Definable Enable Pin 1: A TTL output signal allowing control of external logic through the Control  
Bus Interface. EP1 is asserted/deasserted through Enable Bit 1 (EB1) of the User Definable Register  
(UDR). When Enable Bit 1 is set to zero, EP1 is deasserted. When Enable Bit 1 is set to one, EP1 is  
asserted.  
93  
6.0 Signal Descriptions (Continued)  
POWER AND GROUND  
a
All power pins should be connected to a single 5V power supply using the recommended filtering. All ground pins should be  
connected to a common 0V ground supply. Bypassing and filtering requirements are given in a separate User Information  
Document.  
Ý
Symbol  
ANALOG  
Pin  
I/O  
Description  
a
Power: Positive 5V power supply for the PLAYER device’s CGM VCO.  
V
CC  
20  
Ð
a
Ground: Power supply return for the PLAYER device’s CGM VCO.  
GND ANALOG  
Ð
21  
88  
87  
V
CC  
CORE  
Power: Positive 5V power supply for the core PLAYER section logic gates.  
Ground: Power supply return for the core PLAYER section logic gates.  
Ð
GND CORE  
Ð
a
Power: Positive 5V power supply for the PLAYER device’s ECL logic gates.  
V
CC  
ECL  
31,  
34,  
44,  
56  
Ð
a
Ground: Power supply return for the PLAYER device’s ECL logic gates.  
GND ECL  
Ð
35,  
45,  
55  
a
Power: Positive 5V power supply for the PLAYER device’s ESD protection circuitry.  
V
ESD  
28  
29  
CC  
Ð
a
Ground: Power supply return for the PLAYER device’s ESD protection circuitry.  
GND ESD  
Ð
V
CC  
IO  
11,  
65,  
79,  
98  
Power: Positive 5V power supply for the input/output buffers.  
Ð
GND IO  
Ð
12,  
64,  
78,  
97  
Ground: Power supply return for the input/output buffers.  
SPECIAL CONNECT PINS  
These are pins that have special connection requirements.  
No Connect (N/C) pins should not be connected to anything. This means not to power, not to ground, and not to each other.  
Reserved 0 (RES 0) pins must be connected to ground. These pins are not used to supply device power so they do not need  
Ð Ð  
to be filtered or bypassed.  
Reserved 1 (RES 1) pins must be connected to power. These pins are not used to supply device power so they do not need  
Ð Ð  
to be filtered or bypassed.  
Ý
Symbol Pin  
I/O  
Description  
N/C  
49, 54  
No Connect: Pins should not be connected to anything. This means not to power, not to ground, and  
not to each other.  
RES  
0
1
18, 19,  
48, 50,  
51, 52,  
53, 57,  
58, 84  
Reserved 0: Pins must be connected to ground. These pins are not used to supply device power so  
they do not need to be filtered or bypassed.  
Ð
Ð
RES  
85  
Reserved 1: Pins must be connected to power. These pins are not used to supply device power so they  
do not need to be filtered or bypassed.  
94  
6.0 Signal Descriptions (Continued)  
6.2 DP83256VF-AP SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS  
The pin descriptions for the DP83256VF-AP are divided into five functional interfaces; PMD Interface, PHY Port Interface,  
Control Bus Interface, Clock Interface, and Miscellaneous Interface.  
For a Pinout Summary List, refer to Table 8-2 and Figure 8-2, DP83256VF-AP 100-Pin JEDEC Metric PQFP Pinout.  
PMD INTERFACE  
a
The PMD Interface consists of I/O signals used to connect the PLAYER device to the Physical Medium Dependant (PMD)  
sublayer.  
a
The DP83256VF-AP PLAYER device actually has two PMD interfaces. The Primary PMD Interface and the Alternate PMD  
Interface.  
The Primary PMD Interface should be used for all PMD implementations that do not require an external scrambler/descrambler  
function, clock recovery function, or clock generation function, such as a Fiber Optic or Shielded Twisted Pair (SDDI) PMD. The  
second, Alternate PMD Interface can be used to support Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) PMDs that require external scrambling,  
with no external clock recovery or clock generation functions required.  
a
Section 3.8 describes how the PLAYER can be connected to the PMD and how the Alternate PMD can be enabled.  
Note that when the Alternate PMD Interface is not being used, the pins that make up the interface must be connected in the  
specific way described in the following Alternate PMD Interface table.  
Primary PMD Interface  
Ý
Symbol Pin  
I/O  
Description  
a
b
PMID  
PMID  
42  
I
PMD Indicate Data: Differential, 100k ECL, 125 Mbps serial data input signals from the PMD Receiver  
a
into the Clock Recovery Module (CRM) of the PLAYER  
.
41  
a
b
PMRD  
PMRD  
34  
33  
O
I
PMD Request Data: Differential, 100k ECL, 125 Mbps serial data output signals to the PMD transmitter.  
a
b
SD  
SD  
40  
39  
Signal Detect: Differential 100k ECL input signals from the PMD receiver indicating that a signal is being  
received by the PMD receiver.  
95  
6.0 Signal Descriptions (Continued)  
Alternate PMD Interface  
Ý
Symbol  
Pin  
I/O  
Description  
a
b
PMID  
PMID  
42  
I
PMD Indicate Data: Differential, 100k ECL, 125 Mbps serial data input signals from the PMD  
a
Receiver into the Clock Recovery Module (CRM) of the PLAYER  
.
41  
a
b
RXC OUT  
Ð
RXC OUT  
36  
35  
O
O
I
Recovered Clock Out: 125 MHz clock recovered by the Clock Recovery Module (CRM) from the  
PMID data input.  
Ð
These signals are only active when the Alternate PMD Enable (APMDEN) bit of the Alternate PMD  
Register (APMDREG) is set to a 1 and are off by default after Reset.  
When these two pins are not used they should be left Not Connected (N/C).  
a
b
RXD OUT  
Ð
RXD OUT  
52  
51  
Recovered Data Out: 125 Mbps data recovered by the Clock Recovery Module (CRM) from the  
PMID data input.  
Ð
These signals are only active when the Alternate PMD Enable (APMDEN) bit of the Alternate PMD  
Register (APMDREG) is set to a 1 and are off by default after Reset.  
When these two pins are not used they should be left Not Connected (N/C).  
a
b
a
Receive Clock In: Clock inputs to the Player section of the PLAYER . These inputs must be  
synchronized with the RXD IN inputs.  
Ð
RXC IN  
Ð
RXC IN  
48  
47  
Ð
These signals are only active when the Alternate PMD Enable (APMDEN) bit of the Alternate PMD  
Register (APMDREG) is set to a 1 and are off by default after Reset.  
When these two pins are not used, pin 76 should be left Not Connected (N/C) and pin 75 should be  
connected directly to ground (Reserved 0).  
Ð
a
b
a
Receive Data In: Data inputs to the Player section of the PLAYER . These inputs must be  
synchronized with the RXC IN inputs.  
Ð
RXD IN  
Ð
RXD IN  
50  
49  
I
Ð
These signals are only active when the Alternate PMD Enable (APMDEN) bit of the Alternate PMD  
Register (APMDREG) is set to a 1 and are off by default after Reset.  
When these two pins are not used, pin 78 should be left Not Connected (N/C) and pin 77 should be  
connected directly to ground (Reserved 0).  
Ð
a
b
PMRD  
PMRD  
34  
33  
O
O
PMD Request Data: Differential, 100k ECL, 125 Mbps serial data output signals to the PMD  
transmitter.  
a
b
TXC  
TXC  
31  
30  
Transmit Clock: 125 MHz, 100k ECL compatible differential outputs synchronized to the outgoing  
PMRD data.  
These signals can be enabled using the Transmit Clock Enable (TXCE) bit in the Clock Generation  
Module Register (CGMREG).  
When these two pins are not used they should be left Not Connected (N/C).  
a
b
SD  
SD  
40  
39  
I
Signal Detect: Differential, 100k ECL, input signals from the PMD receiver indicating that a signal  
is being received by the PMD receiver.  
96  
6.0 Signal Descriptions (Continued)  
PHY PORT INTERFACE  
a
The PHY Port Interface consists of I/O signals used to connect the PLAYER device to the Media Access Control (MAC)  
sublayer or other PLAYER device. The DP83256 Device has two PHY Port Interfaces. The A Indicate path from one PHY  
a
Ð
Port Interface and the B Request path from the second PHY Port Interface. Each path consists of an odd parity bit, a control  
Ð
bit, and two 4-bit symbols.  
Refer to section 3.3, the Configuration Switch, for more information.  
Ý
Symbol Pin  
I/O  
Description  
AIP  
6
O
PHY Port A Indicate Parity: A TTL output signal representing odd parity for the 10-bit wide Port A  
k
l
Indicate signals (AIP, AIC, and AID 7:0 ).  
k
l
PHY Port A Indicate Control: TTL output signal indicating that the two 4-bit symbols (AID 7:4 and  
AIC  
7
O
O
k
l
AID 3:0 ) are either control symbols (AIC 1) or data symbols (AIC 0).  
e
e
AID7  
AID6  
AID5  
AID4  
8
9
PHY Port A Indicate Data: TTL output signals representing the first 4-bit data/control symbol.  
AID7 is the most significant bit and AID4 is the least significant bit of the first symbol.  
10  
13  
AID3  
AID2  
AID1  
AID0  
14  
15  
16  
17  
O
PHY Port A Indicate Data: TTL output signals representing the second 4-bit data/control symbol.  
AID3 is the most significant bit and AID0 is the least significant bit of the second symbol.  
BRP  
70  
I
I
I
PHY Port B Request Parity: A TTL input signal representing odd parity for the 10-bit wide Port A  
k
l
Request signals (BRP, BRC, and BRD 7:0 ).  
k
l
PHY Port B Request Control: A TTL input signal indicating that the two 4-bit symbols (BRD 7:4 and  
BRC  
69  
k
l
BRD 3:0 ) are either control symbols (BRC 1) or data symbols (BRC 0).  
e
e
BRD7  
BRD6  
BRD5  
BRD4  
68  
67  
66  
63  
PHY Port B Request Data: TTL input signals representing the first 4-bit data/control symbol.  
BRD7 is the most significant bit and BRD4 is the least significant bit of the first symbol.  
BRD3  
BRD2  
BRD1  
BRD0  
62  
61  
60  
59  
I
PHY Port B Request Data: TTL input signals representing the second 4-bit data/control symbol.  
BRD3 is the most significant bit and BRD0 is the least significant bit of the second symbol.  
97  
6.0 Signal Descriptions (Continued)  
CONTROL BUS INTERFACE  
a
The Control Bus Interface consists of I/O signals used to connect the PLAYER device to Station Management (SMT).  
a
The Control Bus is an asynchronous interface between the PLAYER device and a general purpose microprocessor or other  
controller. It provides access to 64 8-bit internal registers.  
a
In the PLAYER device the Control Bus address range has been expanded by 1-bit to 6 bits of address space.  
Ý
Symbol Pin  
I/O  
Description  
E
CE  
73  
I
Control Enable: An active-low, TTL, input signal which enables the Control Bus port for a read or write  
k
l
k
cycle. R/ W, CBA 5:0 , CBP, and CBD 7:0 must be valid at the time CE is low.  
l
E
E
E
E
Read/ Write: A TTL input signal which indicates a read Control Bus cycle (R/  
Control Bus cycle (R/  
E
e
W 1), or a write  
R/  
W
72  
I
E
e
0).  
W
E
E
or write cycle. During a read cycle, CBD 7:0 are valid as long as ACK is low ( ACK 0). During a  
ACK  
75  
O
Acknowledge: An active low, TTL, open drain output signal which indicates the completion of a read  
l
k
write cycle, a microprocessor must hold CBD 7:0 valid until ACK becomes low. Once ACK is low,  
E
E
e
k
l
it will remain low as long as CE remains low ( CE 0).  
E
E
E
E
e
E
E
INT  
74  
O
I
Interrupt: An active low, open drain, TTL, output signal indicating that an interrupt condition has  
occurred. The Interrupt Condition Register (ICR) should be read in order to find out the source of the  
interrupt. Interrupts can be masked through the use of the Interrupt Condition Mask Register (ICMR).  
CBA5  
CBA4  
CBA3  
CBA2  
CBA1  
CBA0  
83  
82  
81  
80  
77  
76  
Control Bus Address: TTL input signals used to select the address of the register to be read or written.  
CBA5 is the most significant bit (MSB) and CBA0 is the least significant bit (LSB) of the address signals.  
CBP  
96  
I/O Control Bus Parity: A bidirectional, TTL signal representing odd parity for the Control Bus data  
k
l
(CBD 7:0 ).  
a
E
During a read cycle, the signal is held valid by the PLAYER device as long as ACK is low.  
E
E
During a write cycle, the signal must be valid when CE is low, and must be held valid until ACK  
becomes low. If incorrect parity is used during a write cycle, the PLAYER device will inhibit the write  
a
cycle and set the Control Bus Data Parity Error (CPE) bit in the Interrupt Condition Register (ICR).  
CBD7  
CBD6  
CBD5  
CBD4  
CBD3  
CBD2  
CBD1  
CBD0  
95  
94  
93  
92  
91  
90  
89  
86  
I/O Control Bus Data: Bidirectional, TTL signals containing the data to be read from or written to a register.  
a
E
During a read cycle, the signal is held valid by the PLAYER device as long as ACK is low.  
E
E
During a write cycle, the signal must be valid when CE is low, and must be held valid until ACK  
becomes low.  
98  
6.0 Signal Descriptions (Continued)  
CLOCK INTERFACE  
a
The Clock Interface consists of 12.5 MHz and 25 MHz clocks supplied by the PLAYER device as well as reference and  
feedback inputs.  
Ý
Symbol  
LBC1  
Pin  
I/O  
Description  
4
3
2
1
O
Local Byte Clock: TTL compatible, 12.5 MHz, 50% duty cycle clock outputs which are phase  
locked to a crystal oscillator or reference signal. The PH SEL input determines whether the five  
phase outputs are phase offset by 8 ns or 16 ns.  
LBC2  
LBC3  
LBC4  
LBC5  
Ð
100  
PH SEL  
Ð
22  
25  
99  
5
I
Phase Select: TTL compatible input used to select either a 8 ns or 16 ns phase offset between the 5  
local byte clocks (LBC’s). The LBC’s are phase offset 8 ns apart when PH SEL is at a logic LOW  
level and 16 ns apart when at a logic HI level.  
Ð
FBK IN  
Ð
I
Feedback Input: TTL compatible input for use as the PLL’s phase comparator feedback input to  
close the Phase Locked Loop. This input is intended to be driven from one of the Local Byte Clocks  
a
(LBC’s) from the same PLAYER device.  
LSC  
O
O
Local Symbol Clock: TTL compatible 25 MHz output for driving the MACSI or BMAC devices. This  
output’s negative phase transition is aligned with the LBC1 output transitions and has a 40% HI and  
60% LOW duty cycle.  
CLK16  
Clock 16/32: TTL compatible clock with a selectable frequency of approximately 15.625 MHz or  
31.25 MHz. The frequency can be selected using the Clock Select (CLKSEL) bit of the Mode 2  
Register (MODE2).  
Note: No glitches appear at the output when switching frequencies.  
XTAL IN  
Ð
27  
I
External Crystal Oscillator Input: This input in conjunction with the XTAL OUT output, is  
Ð
designed for use of an external crystal oscillator network as the frequency reference for the clock  
generation module’s internal VCO. A diagram of the required circuit, which includes only a 12.5 MHz  
crystal and 2 loading capacitors, is shown inFigure 3-19.  
This input is selected when the REF SEL input is at a logic LOW level. When not being used, this  
Ð
input should be tied to ground.  
XTAL OUT  
Ð
26  
24  
23  
O
I
External Crystal Oscillator Output: This output in conjunction with the XTAL IN input, is designed  
Ð
for use of an external crystal oscillator network as the frequency reference for the clock generation  
module’s internal VCO. A diagram of the required circuit, which includes only a 12.5 MHz crystal and  
2 loading capacitors, is shown inFigure 3-19.  
REF IN  
Ð
Reference Input: TTL compatible input for use as the PLL’s phase comparator reference frequency.  
This input is for use in dual attach station or concentrator configurations where there are multiple  
a
PLAYER devices at a given site requiring synchronization.  
This input is selected when the REF SEL input is at a logic HI level.  
Ð
REF SEL  
Ð
I
Reference Select: TTL compatible input which selects either the crystal oscillator inputs XTAL IN  
Ð
and XTAL OUT or the REF IN inputs as the reference frequency inputs for the PLL.  
Ð Ð  
The crystal oscillator inputs are selected when REF SEL is at a logic LOW level and the REF IN  
Ð
input is selected as the reference when REF SEL is at a logic HI level.  
Ð
Ð
99  
6.0 Signal Descriptions (Continued)  
MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACE  
The Miscellaneous Interface consist of a reset signal and user definable enable signals.  
Ý
Symbol Pin  
I/O  
Description  
E
RST  
71  
I
Reset: An active low, TTL, input signal which clears all registers. The signal must be kept asserted for a  
E
a
minimum amount of time. Once the RST signal is asserted, the PLAYER device should be allowed  
the specified amount of time to reset internal logic. Note that bit zero of the Mode Register will be set to  
zero (i.e. Stop Mode). See section 4.2, Stop Mode of Operation for more information  
EP0  
41  
O
O
User Definable Enable Pin 0: A TTL output signal allowing control of external logic through the Control  
Bus Interface. EP0 is asserted/deasserted through Enable Bit 0 (EB0) of the User Definable Register  
(UDR). When Enable Bit 0 is set to zero, EP0 is deasserted. When Enable Bit 0 is set to one, EP0 is  
asserted.  
EP1  
43  
User Definable Enable Pin 1: A TTL output signal allowing control of external logic through the Control  
Bus Interface. EP1 is asserted/deasserted through Enable Bit 1 (EB1) of the User Definable Register  
(UDR). When Enable Bit 1 is set to zero, EP1 is deasserted. When Enable Bit 1 is set to one, EP1 is  
asserted.  
100  
6.0 Signal Descriptions (Continued)  
POWER AND GROUND  
a
All power pins should be connected to a single 5V power supply using the recommended filtering. All ground pins should be  
connected to a common 0V ground supply. Bypassing and filtering requirements are given in a separate User Information  
Document.  
Ý
Symbol  
ANALOG  
Pin  
I/O  
Description  
V
20  
Power: Positive 5V power supply for the Clock Generation Module VCO.  
Ground: Power supply return for the Clock Generation Module VCO.  
Power: Positive 5V power supply for the core PLAYER section logic gates.  
Ground: Power supply return for the core PLAYER section logic gates.  
CC  
Ð
GND ANALOG  
Ð
21  
88  
87  
V
CC  
CORE  
Ð
GND CORE  
Ð
a
Power: Positive 5V power supply for the PLAYER device’s ECL logic gates.  
V
CC  
ECL  
32,  
37,  
45,  
56  
Ð
a
Ground: Power supply return for the PLAYER device’s ECL logic gates.  
GND ECL  
Ð
38,  
46,  
55  
a
Power: Positive 5V power supply for the PLAYER device’s ESD protection circuitry.  
V
ESD  
28  
29  
CC  
Ð
a
Ground: Power supply return for the PLAYER device’s ESD protection circuitry.  
GND ESD  
Ð
V
CC  
IO  
11,  
65,  
79,  
98  
Power: Positive 5V power supply for the input/output buffers.  
Ð
GND IO  
Ð
12,  
64,  
78,  
97  
Ground: Power supply return for the input/output buffers.  
SPECIAL CONNECT PINS  
These are pins that have special connection requirements.  
No Connect (N/C) pins should not be connected to anything. This means not to power, not to ground, and not to each other.  
Reserved 0 (RES 0) pins must be connected to ground. These pins are not used to supply device power so they do not need  
Ð Ð  
to be filtered or bypassed.  
Reserved 1 (RES 1) pins must be connected to power. These pins are not used to supply device power so they do not need  
Ð Ð  
to be filtered or bypassed.  
Ý
Symbol Pin  
I/O  
Description  
49, 53,  
54  
N/C  
No Connect: Pins should not be connected to anything. This means not to power, not to ground, and  
not to each other.  
RES  
0
1
18, 19,  
48, 50,  
51, 52,  
57, 58,  
84  
Reserved 0: Pins must be connected to ground. These pins are not used to supply device power so  
they do not need to be filtered or bypassed.  
Ð
Ð
RES  
85  
Reserved 1: Pins must be connected to power. These pins are not used to supply device power so they  
do not need to be filtered or bypassed.  
101  
6.0 Signal Descriptions (Continued)  
6.3 DP83257VF SIGNAL DESCRIPTIONS  
The pin descriptions for the DP83257VF are divided into five functional interfaces; PMD Interface, PHY Port Interface, Control  
Bus Interface, Clock Interface, and Miscellaneous Interface.  
For a Pinout Summary List, refer to Table 8-3 and Figure 8-3, DP83257VF 160-Pin JEDEC Metric PQFP Pinout.  
PMD INTERFACE  
a
The PMD Interface consists of I/O signals used to connect the PLAYER device to the Physical Medium Dependant (PMD)  
sublayer.  
a
The DP83257 PLAYER device actually has two PMD interfaces. The Primary PMD Interface and the Alternate PMD Interface.  
The Primary PMD Interface should be used for all PMD implementations that do not require an external scrambler/descrambler  
function, clock recovery function, or clock generation function, such as a Fiber Optic or Shielded Twisted Pair (SDDI) PMD. The  
second, Alternate PMD Interface can be used to support Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) PMDs that require external scrambling,  
with no external clock recovery or clock generation functions required.  
a
Section 3.8 describes how the PLAYER can be connected to the PMD and how the Alternate PMD can be enabled.  
Note that when the Alternate PMD Interface is not being used, the pins that make up the interface must be connected in the  
specific way described in the following Alternate PMD Interface table.  
Primary PMD Interface  
Ý
Symbol Pin  
I/O  
Description  
a
b
PMID  
PMID  
62  
I
PMD Indicate Data: Differential, 100k ECL, 125 Mbps serial data input signals from the PMD Receiver  
a
into the Clock Recovery Module (CRM) of the PLAYER  
.
61  
a
b
PMRD  
PMRD  
54  
53  
O
I
PMD Request Data: Differential, 100k ECL, 125 Mbps serial data output signals to the PMD transmitter.  
a
b
SD  
SD  
60  
59  
Signal Detect: Differential 100k ECL input signals from the PMD receiver indicating that a signal is being  
received by the PMD receiver.  
TEL  
74  
I
PMD Transmitter Enable Level: A TTL input signal to select the PMD transmitter Enable (TXE) signal  
level.  
TXE  
73  
O
PMD Transmitter Enable: A TTL output signal to enable/disable the PMD transmitter. The output level  
of the TXE pin is determined by three parameters: the Transmit Enable (TE) bit in the Mode Register, the  
TM2TM0 bits in the Current Transmit State Register, and the input to the TEL pin. The following rules  
summarize the output of the TXE pin:  
e
e
e
1. If TE 0 and TEL GND, then TXE V  
CC  
e
e
e
e
, then TXE GND  
2. If TE 0 and TEL  
V
CC  
e
3. If TE 1 and OTM and TEL GND, then TXE V  
e
e
CC  
, then TXE GND  
e
e
5. If TE 1 and not OTM and TEL GND, then TXE GND  
4. If TE 1 and OTM and TEL  
V
CC  
e
e
e
e
6. If TE 1 and not OTM and TEL  
e
e
V , then TXE V  
CC CC  
102  
6.0 Signal Descriptions (Continued)  
Alternate PMD Interface  
Ý
Symbol  
Pin  
I/O  
Description  
a
b
PMID  
PMID  
62  
I
PMD Indicate Data: Differential, 100k ECL, 125 Mbps serial data input signals from the PMD  
a
Receiver into the Clock Recovery Module (CRM) of the PLAYER  
.
61  
a
b
RXC OUT  
Ð
RXC OUT  
56  
55  
O
O
I
Recovered Clock Out: 125 MHz clock recovered by the Clock Recovery Module (CRM) from the  
PMID data input.  
Ð
These signals are only active when the Alternate PMD Enable (APMDEN) bit of the Alternate PMD  
Register (APMDREG) is set to a 1 and are off by default after Reset.  
When these two pins are not used they should be left Not Connected (N/C).  
a
b
RXD OUT  
Ð
RXD OUT  
83  
82  
Recovered Data Out: 125 Mbps data recovered by the Clock Recovery Module (CRM) from the  
PMID data input.  
Ð
These signals are only active when the Alternate PMD Enable (APMDEN) bit of the Alternate PMD  
Register (APMDREG) is set to a 1 and are off by default after Reset.  
When these two pins are not used they should be left Not Connected (N/C).  
a
b
a
Receive Clock In: Clock inputs to the Player section of the PLAYER . These inputs must be  
synchronized with the RXD IN inputs.  
Ð
RXC IN  
Ð
RXC IN  
76  
75  
Ð
These signals are only active when the Alternate PMD Enable (APMDEN) bit of the Alternate PMD  
Register (APMDREG) is set to a 1 and are off by default after Reset.  
When these two pins are not used, pin 76 should be left Not Connected (N/C) and pin 75 should be  
connected directly to ground (Reserved 0).  
Ð
a
b
a
Receive Data In: Data inputs to the Player section of the PLAYER . These inputs must be  
synchronized with the RXC IN inputs.  
Ð
RXD IN  
Ð
RXD IN  
78  
77  
I
Ð
These signals are only active when the Alternate PMD Enable (APMDEN) bit of the Alternate PMD  
Register (APMDREG) is set to a 1 and are off by default after Reset.  
When these two pins are not used, pin 78 should be left Not Connected (N/C) and pin 77 should be  
connected directly to ground (Reserved 0).  
Ð
a
b
PMRD  
PMRD  
54  
53  
O
O
PMD Request Data: Differential, 100k ECL, 125 Mbps serial data output signals to the PMD  
transmitter.  
a
b
TXC  
TXC  
51  
50  
Transmit Clock: 125 MHz, 100k ECL compatible differential outputs synchronized to the outgoing  
PMRD data.  
These signals can be enabled using the Transmit Clock Enable (TXCE) bit in the Clock Generation  
Module Register (CGMREG).  
When these two pins are not used they should be left Not Connected (N/C).  
a
b
SD  
SD  
60  
59  
I
I
Signal Detect: Differential, 100k ECL, input signals from the PMD receiver indicating that a signal  
is being received by the PMD receiver.  
TEL  
74  
PMD Transmitter Enable Level: A TTL input signal to select the PMD transmitter Enable (TXE)  
signal level.  
TXE  
73  
O
PMD Transmitter Enable: A TTL output signal to enable/disable the PMD transmitter. The output  
level of the TXE pin is determined by three parameters: the Transmit Enable (TE) bit in the Mode  
Register, the TM2TM0 bits in the Current Transmit State Register, and the input to the TEL pin.  
The following rules summarize the output of the TXE pin:  
e
e
e
1. If TE 0 and TEL GND, then TXE V  
CC  
e
e
e
e
, then TXE GND  
2. If TE 0 and TEL  
V
CC  
e
3. If TE 1 and OTM and TEL GND, then TXE V  
e
e
CC  
, then TXE GND  
e
e
5. If TE 1 and not OTM and TEL GND, then TXE GND  
4. If TE 1 and OTM and TEL  
V
CC  
e
e
e
e
6. If TE 1 and not OTM and TEL  
e
e
V , then TXE V  
CC CC  
103  
6.0 Signal Descriptions (Continued)  
PHY PORT INTERFACE  
a
The PHY Port Interface consists of I/O signals used to connect the PLAYER device to the Media Access Control (MAC)  
sublayer or other PLAYER device. The DP83257 Device has two PHY Port Interfaces. The A Request and A Indicate paths  
a
Ð
Ð
from one PHY Port Interface and the B Request and B Indicate paths from the second PHY Port Interface. Each path  
Ð Ð  
consists of an odd parity bit, a control bit, and two 4-bit symbols.  
Refer to section 3.3, the Configuration Switch, for more information.  
Ý
Symbol Pin  
I/O  
Description  
AIP  
6
O
PHY Port A Indicate Parity: A TTL output signal representing odd parity for the 10-bit wide Port A  
k
l
Indicate signals (AIP, AIC, and AID 7:0 ).  
k
l
PHY Port A Indicate Control: A TTL output signal indicating that the two 4-bit symbols (AID 7:4 and  
AIC  
8
O
O
k
l
AID 3:0 ) are either control symbols (AIC 1) or data symbols (AIC 0).  
e
e
AID7  
AID6  
AID5  
AID4  
10  
12  
14  
18  
PHY Port A Indicate Data: TTL output signals representing the first 4-bit data/control symbol.  
AID7 is the most significant bit and AID4 is the least significant bit of the first symbol.  
AID3  
AID2  
AID1  
AID0  
20  
22  
24  
26  
O
PHY Port A Indicate Data: TTL output signals representing the second 4-bit data/control symbol.  
AID3 is the most significant bit and AID0 is the least significant bit of the second symbol.  
ARP  
7
I
I
I
PHY Port A Request Parity: A TTL input signal representing odd parity for the 10-bit wide Port A  
k
l
Request signals (ARP, ARC, and ARD 7:0 ).  
ARC  
9
PHY Port A Request Control: A TTL input signal indicating that the two 4-bit symbols  
k
l
k
l
e
e
(ARD 7:4 and ARD 3:0 ) are either control symbols (ARC 1) or data symbols (ARC 0).  
PHY Port A Request Data: TTL input signals representing the first 4-bit data/control symbol.  
ARD7 is the most significant bit and ARD4 is the least significant bit of the first symbol.  
ARD7  
ARD6  
ARD5  
ARD4  
11  
13  
15  
19  
ARD3  
ARD2  
ARD1  
ARD0  
21  
23  
25  
27  
I
PHY Port A Request Data: TTL input signals representing the second 4-bit data/control symbol.  
ARD3 is the most significant bit and ARD0 is the least significant bit of the second symbol.  
BIP  
114  
O
O
O
PHY Port B Indicate Parity: A TTL output signal representing odd parity for the 10-bit wide Port A  
k
l
Indicate signals (BIP, BIC, and BID 7:0 ).  
k
l
PHY Port B Indicate Control: A TTL output signal indicating that the two 4-bit symbols (BID 7:4 and  
BIC  
112  
k
l
BID 3:0 ) are either control symbols (BIC 1) or data symbols (BIC 0).  
e
e
BID7  
BID6  
BID5  
BID4  
110  
108  
106  
102  
PHY Port B Indicate Data: TTL output signals representing the first 4-bit data/control symbol.  
BID7 is the most significant bit and BID4 is the least significant bit of the first symbol.  
BID3  
BID2  
BID1  
BID0  
100  
98  
O
PHY Port B Indicate Data: TTL output signals representing the second 4-bit data/control symbol.  
BID3 is the most significant bit and BID0 is the least significant bit of the second symbol.  
96  
94  
BRP  
115  
I
I
PHY Port B Request Parity: A TTL input signal representing odd parity for the 10-bit wide Port A  
k
l
Request signals (BRP, BRC, and BRD 7:0 ).  
BRC  
113  
PHY Port B Request Control: A TTL input signal indicating that the two 4-bit symbols  
k
l
k
(BRD 7:4 and BRD 3:0 ) are either control symbols (BRC 1) or data symbols (BRC 0).  
l
e
e
104  
6.0 Signal Descriptions (Continued)  
Ý
Symbol Pin  
I/O  
Description  
BRD7  
BRD6  
BRD5  
BRD4  
111  
109  
I
PHY Port B Request Data: TTL input signals representing the first 4-bit data/control symbol.  
BRD7 is the most significant bit and BRD4 is the least significant bit of the first symbol.  
107  
103  
BRD3  
BRD2  
BRD1  
BRD0  
101  
99  
I
PHY Port B Request Data: TTL input signals representing the second 4-bit data/control symbol.  
BRD3 is the most significant bit and BRD0 is the least significant bit of the second symbol.  
97  
95  
105  
6.0 Signal Descriptions (Continued)  
CONTROL BUS INTERFACE  
a
The Control Bus Interface consists of I/O signals used to connect the PLAYER device to Station Management (SMT).  
a
The Control Bus is an asynchronous interface between the PLAYER device and a general purpose microprocessor or other  
controller. It provides access to 64 8-bit internal registers.  
a
In the PLAYER device the Control Bus address range has been expanded by 1-bit to 6 bits of address space.  
Ý
Symbol Pin  
I/O  
Description  
E
CE  
118  
I
Control Enable: An active-low, TTL, input signal which enables the Control Bus port for a read or write  
k
l
k
cycle. R/ W, CBA 5:0 , CBP, and CBD 7:0 must be valid at the time CE is low.  
l
E
E
E
E
Read/ Write: A TTL input signal which indicates a read Control Bus cycle (R/  
Control Bus cycle (R/  
E
e
W 1), or a write  
R/  
W
117  
I
E
e
0).  
W
E
E
or write cycle. During a read cycle, CBD 7:0 are valid as long as ACK is low ( ACK 0). During a  
ACK  
120  
O
Acknowledge: An active low, TTL, open drain output signal which indicates the completion of a read  
l
k
write cycle, a microprocessor must hold CBD 7:0 valid until ACK becomes low. Once ACK is low,  
E
E
e
k
l
it will remain low as long as CE remains low ( CE 0).  
E
E
E
E
e
E
E
INT  
119  
O
I
Interrupt: An active low, open drain, TTL, output signal indicating that an interrupt condition has  
occurred. The Interrupt Condition Register (ICR) should be read in order to find out the source of the  
interrupt. Interrupts can be masked through the use of the Interrupt Condition Mask Register (ICMR).  
CBA5  
CBA4  
CBA3  
CBA2  
CBA1  
CBA0  
135  
134  
133  
132  
129  
128  
Control Bus Address: TTL input signals used to select the address of the register to be read or written.  
CBA5 is the most significant bit (MSB) and CBA0 is the least significant bit (LSB) of the address signals.  
CBP  
148  
I/O Control Bus Parity: A bidirectional, TTL signal representing odd parity for the Control Bus data  
l
l
(CBD 7:0 ).  
a
E
During a read cycle, the signal is held valid by the PLAYER device as long as ACK is low.  
E
E
During a write cycle, the signal must be valid when CE is low, and must be held valid until ACK  
becomes low. If incorrect parity is used during a write cycle, the PLAYER device will inhibit the write  
a
cycle and set the Control Bus Data Parity Error (CPE) bit in the Interrupt Condition Register (ICR).  
CBD7  
CBD6  
CBD5  
CBD4  
CBD3  
CBD2  
CBD1  
CBD0  
147  
146  
145  
144  
143  
142  
141  
138  
I/O Control Bus Data: Bidirectional, TTL signals containing the data to be read from or written to a register.  
a
E
During a read cycle, the signal is held valid by the PLAYER device as long as ACK is low.  
E
E
During a write cycle, the signal must be valid when CE is low, and must be held valid until ACK  
becomes low.  
106  
6.0 Signal Descriptions (Continued)  
CLOCK INTERFACE  
a
The Clock Interface consists of 12.5 MHz and 25 MHz clocks supplied by the PLAYER device as well as reference and  
feedback inputs.  
Ý
Symbol  
LBC1  
Pin  
I/O  
Description  
4
3
2
1
O
Local Byte Clock: TTL compatible, 12.5 MHz, 50% duty cycle clock outputs which are phase  
locked to a crystal oscillator or reference signal. The PH SEL input determines whether the five  
phase outputs are phase offset by 8 ns or 16 ns.  
LBC2  
LBC3  
LBC4  
LBC5  
Ð
160  
PH SEL  
Ð
34  
37  
159  
5
I
Phase Select: TTL compatible input used to select either a 8 ns or 16 ns phase offset between the 5  
local byte clocks (LBC’s). The LBC’s are phase offset 8 ns apart when PH SEL is at a logic LOW  
level and 16 ns apart when at a logic HI level.  
Ð
FBK IN  
Ð
I
Feedback Input: TTL compatible input for use as the PLL’s phase comparator feedback input to  
close the Phase Locked Loop. This input is intended to be driven from one of the Local Byte Clocks  
a
(LBC’s) from the same PLAYER device.  
LSC  
O
O
Local Symbol Clock: TTL compatible 25 MHz output for driving the MACSI or BMAC devices. This  
output’s negative phase transition is aligned with the LBC1 output transitions and has a 40% HI and  
60% LOW duty cycle.  
CLK16  
Clock 16/32: TTL compatible clock with a selectable frequency of approximately 15.625 MHz or  
31.25 MHz. The frequency can be selected using the Clock Select (CLKSEL) bit of the Mode 2  
Register (MODE2).  
Note: No glitches appear at the output when switching frequencies.  
XTAL IN  
Ð
46  
I
External Crystal Oscillator Input: This input in conjunction with the XTAL OUT output, is  
Ð
designed for use of an external crystal oscillator network as the frequency reference for the clock  
generation module’s internal VCO. A diagram of the required circuit, which includes only a 12.5 MHz  
crystal and 2 loading capacitors, is shown inFigure 3-19.  
This input is selected when the REF SEL input is at a logic LOW level. When not being used, this  
Ð
input should be tied to ground.  
XTAL OUT  
Ð
45  
36  
O
I
External Crystal Oscillator Output: This output in conjunction with the XTAL IN input, is designed  
Ð
for use of an external crystal oscillator network as the frequency reference for the clock generation  
module’s internal VCO. A diagram of the required circuit, which includes only a 12.5 MHz crystal and  
2 loading capacitors, is shown inFigure 3-19.  
REF IN  
Ð
Reference Input: TTL compatible input for use as the PLL’s phase comparator reference frequency.  
This input is for use in dual attach station or concentrator configurations where there are multiple  
a
PLAYER devices at a given site requiring synchronization.  
This input is selected when the REF SEL input is at a logic HI level.  
Ð
REF SEL  
Ð
35  
49  
I
Reference Select: TTL compatible input which selects either the crystal oscillator inputs XTAL IN  
Ð
and XTAL OUT or the REF IN inputs as the reference frequency inputs for the PLL.  
Ð Ð  
The crystal oscillator inputs are selected when REF SEL is at a logic LOW level and the REF IN  
Ð
Ð
input is selected as the reference when REF SEL is at a logic HI level.  
Ð
LPFLTR  
O
Loop Filter: This is a diagnostic output that allows monitoring of the clock generation module’s filter  
node. This output is disabled by default and does not need to be connected to any external device. It  
can be enabled using the FLTREN bit of the Clock generation module register (CGMREG).  
Note: In normal operation this pin should be disabled.  
107  
6.0 Signal Descriptions (Continued)  
MISCELLANEOUS INTERFACE  
The Miscellaneous Interface consist of a reset signal, user definable sense signals, and user definable enable signals.  
Ý
Symbol Pin  
I/O  
Description  
E
RST  
116  
I
Reset: An active low, TTL, input signal which clears all registers. The signal must be kept asserted for a  
E
a
minimum amount of time. Once the RST signal is asserted, the PLAYER device should be allowed  
the specified amount of time to reset internal logic. Note that bit zero of the Mode Register will be set to  
zero (i.e. Stop Mode). See section 4.2, Stop Mode of Operation for more information  
SP0  
63  
I
I
I
User Definable Sense Pin 0: A TTL input signal from a user defined source. Sense Bit 0 (SB0) of the  
User Definable Register (UDR) will be set to one if the signal is asserted for a minimum of 160 ns. Once  
the asserted signal is latched, Sense Bit 0 can only be cleared through the Control Bus Interface, even if  
the signal is deasserted. This ensures that the Control Bus Interface will record the source of events  
which can cause interrupts.  
SP1  
SP2  
65  
67  
User Definable Sense Pin 1: A TTL input signal from a user defined source. Sense Bit 1 (SB1) of the  
User Definable Register (UDR) will be set to one if the signal is asserted for a minimum of 160 ns. Once  
the asserted signal is latched, Sense Bit 1 can only be cleared through the Control Bus Interface, even if  
the signal is deasserted. This ensures that the Control Bus Interface will record the source of events  
which can cause interrupts.  
User Definable Sense Pin 2: A TTL input signal from a user defined source. Sense Bit 2 (SB2) of the  
User Definable Register (UDR) will be set to one if the signal is asserted for a minimum of 160 ns. Once  
the asserted signal is latched, Sense Bit 2 can only be cleared through the Control Bus Interface, even if  
the signal is deasserted. This ensures that the Control Bus Interface will record the source of events  
which can cause interrupts.  
EP0  
EP1  
64  
66  
O
O
User Definable Enable Pin 0: A TTL output signal allowing control of external logic through the Control  
Bus Interface. EP0 is asserted/deasserted through Enable Bit 0 (EB0) of the User Definable Register  
(UDR). When Enable Bit 0 is set to zero, EP0 is deasserted. When Enable Bit 0 is set to one, EP0 is  
asserted.  
User Definable Enable Pin 1: A TTL output signal allowing control of external logic through the Control  
Bus Interface. EP1 is asserted/deasserted through Enable Bit 1 (EB1) of the User Definable Register  
(UDR). When Enable Bit 1 is set to zero, EP1 is deasserted. When Enable Bit 1 is set to one, EP1 is  
asserted.  
EP2  
CS  
68  
69  
O
I
User Definable Enable Pin 2: A TTL output signal allowing control of external logic through the Control  
Bus Interface. EP2 is asserted/deasserted through Enable Bit 2 (EB2) of the User Definable Register  
(UDR). When Enable Bit 2 is set to zero, EP2 is deasserted. When Enable Bit 2 is set to one, EP2 is  
asserted.  
a
Cascade Start: A TTL input signal used to synchronize cascaded PLAYER devices in point-to-point  
applications.  
a
The signal is asserted when all of the cascaded PLAYER devices have the Cascade Mode (CM) bit of  
a
the Mode Register (MR) set to one, and all of the Cascade Ready (CR) pins of the cascaded PLAYER  
devices have been released.  
When Cascade Mode is not being used, this input should be tied to Ground.  
For further information, refer to section 4.4, Cascade Mode of Operation.  
a
Cascade Ready: An Open Drain output signal used to synchronize cascaded PLAYER devices in  
point-to-point applications.  
CR  
70  
O
a
The signal is released (i.e. an Open Drain line is released) when all the cascaded PLAYER devices  
have the Cascade Mode (CM) bit of the Mode Register (MR) is set to one and a JK symbol pair has been  
received.  
When Cascade Mode is not being used, this input should be left Not Connected (N/C).  
For further information, refer to section 4.4, Cascade Mode of Operation.  
108  
6.0 Signal Descriptions (Continued)  
POWER AND GROUND  
a
All power pins should be connected to a single 5V power supply using the recommended filtering. All ground pins should be  
connected to a common 0V ground supply. Bypassing and filtering requirements are given in a separate User Information  
Document.  
Ý
Symbol  
ANALOG  
Pin  
I/O  
Description  
a
Power: Positive 5V power supply for the PLAYER device’s CGM VCO.  
V
CC  
32  
Ð
a
Ground: Power supply return for the PLAYER device’s CGM VCO.  
GND ANALOG  
Ð
33  
V
CORE  
140  
139  
Power: Positive 5V power supply for the core PLAYER logic gates.  
Ground: Power supply return for the core PLAYER logic gates.  
CC  
Ð
GND CORE  
Ð
a
Power: Positive 5V power supply for the PLAYER device’s ECL logic gates.  
V
CC  
ECL  
52, 57,  
71, 89  
Ð
a
Ground: Power supply return for the PLAYER device’s ECL logic gates.  
GND ECL  
Ð
58, 72,  
88  
a
Power: Positive 5V power supply for the PLAYER device’s ESD protection circuitry.  
V
ESD  
47  
48  
CC  
Ð
a
Ground: Power supply return for the PLAYER device’s ESD protection circuitry.  
GND ESD  
Ð
V
CC  
IO  
16, 105,  
131, 158  
Power: Positive 5V power supply for the input/output buffers.  
Ð
GND IO  
Ð
17, 104,  
130, 157  
Ground: Power supply return for the input/output buffers.  
SPECIAL CONNECT PINS  
These are pins that have special connection requirements.  
No Connect (N/C) pins should not be connected to anything. This means not to power, not to ground, and not to each other.  
Reserved 0 (RES 0) pins must be connected to ground. These pins are not used to supply device power so they do not need  
Ð Ð  
to be filtered or bypassed.  
Reserved 1 (RES 1) pins must be connected to power. These pins are not used to supply device power so they do not need  
Ð Ð  
to be filtered or bypassed.  
Ý
Symbol  
Pin  
I/O  
Description  
N/C  
38, 39,  
No Connect: Pins should not be connected to anything. This means not to power, not  
to ground, and not to each other.  
40, 41, 42, 43, 44,  
79,  
80, 81, 87,  
121, 122, 123, 124, 125,  
126, 127,  
149,  
150, 151, 152, 153,154,  
155, 156  
RES  
RES  
0
1
28, 29,  
Reserved 0: Pins must be connected to ground. These pins are not used to supply  
device power so they do not need to be filtered or bypassed.  
Ð
Ð
30, 31,  
84, 85, 86,  
90, 91, 92, 93,  
136  
137  
Reserved 1: Pins must be connected to power. These pins are not used to supply  
device power so they do not need to be filtered or bypassed.  
109  
7.0 Electrical Characteristics  
7.1 ABSOLUTE MAXIMUM RATINGS  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Supply Voltage  
Input Voltage  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
7.0  
a
Units  
b
V
CC  
0.5  
0.5  
0.5  
V
V
V
b
b
DC  
DC  
V
V
0.5  
0.5  
IN  
CC  
a
CC  
Output Voltage  
OUT  
V
ESD to other V  
CC  
CC  
Ð
Maximum Voltage  
Differential  
0.3  
V
b
Storage Temperature  
Signal Output Current  
ESD Protection  
65  
150  
C
§
b
ECL  
50  
mA  
2000  
V
7.2 RECOMMENDED OPERATING CONDITIONS  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Supply Voltage  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
5.25  
70  
Units  
V
T
4.75  
0
V
CC  
Operating Temperature  
C
§
A
a
FREF  
Reference Input Frequency  
12.550 ppm  
12.5  
12.5  
50 ppm  
MHz  
7.3 RECOMMENDED EXTERNAL COMPONENTS  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Crystal Specifications  
Center Frequency  
Frequency Calibration  
Frequency Stability  
Aging  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
XTAL  
12.5  
MHz  
ppm  
ppm  
ppm  
mF  
b
b
10  
10  
10  
10  
5
Over Temperature  
Less Than  
b
5
Recommended Power Supply Bypassing Capacitor Value  
0.1  
Note: Capacitors should be placed between each supply pair as close to the  
device as possible.  
7.4 DC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS  
The DC characteristics are specified over the Recommended Operating Conditions, unless otherwise specified.  
DC Electrical Characteristics for All TTL-Compatible Inputs  
The following signals are covered: PHY Port Request Signals (ARD, ARC, ARP, BRD, BRC, BRP), Phase Select (PH SEL),  
Ð
Reference Select (REF SEL), Sense Pins (SP), Cascade Start (CS), PMD Transmitter Enable Level (TEL), Device Reset  
Ð
E
E E  
RST), and Control Bus Interface Inputs (R/ W, CE, CBA).  
(
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
V
V
V
V
Input High Voltage  
Input Low Voltage  
Input Clamp Voltage  
Input Low Current  
Input High Current  
2.0  
IH  
0.8  
V
IL  
e b  
IN  
b
1.5  
I
18 mA  
V
IC  
e
e
b
a
I
I
V
GND  
10  
10  
mA  
mA  
IL  
IH  
IN  
IN  
V
V
CC  
110  
7.0 Electrical Characteristics (Continued)  
DC Electrical Characteristics for All TTL-Compatible Non-TRI-STATE Outputs  
The following signals are covered: Clock 16/32 (CLK16), Enable Pins (EP), and PMD Transmitter Enable (TXE).  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
e b  
b
V
V
Output High Voltage  
Output Low Voltage  
I
I
2 mA  
V
CC  
0.5  
V
V
OH  
OH  
e
4 mA  
0.5  
OL  
OL  
DC Electrical Characteristics for All TTL-Compatible TRI-STATE Outputs  
The following signals are covered: PHY Port Indicate Signals (AID, AIC, AIP, BID, BIC, BIP).  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
V
e b  
b
V
V
Output High Voltage  
Output Low Voltage  
TRI-STATE Leakage  
I
I
2 mA  
V
CC  
0.5  
OH  
OH  
e
4 mA  
0.5  
60  
V
OL  
OL  
e
(Note 1)  
I
V
V
V
mA  
OZ3  
OUT  
CC  
e
b
500  
I
TRI-STATE Leakage  
V
mA  
OZ4  
OUT  
(Note 1)  
GND  
Note 1: Output buffer has a p-channel pullup device.  
DC Electrical Characteristics for All TTL-Compatible Input/Outputs  
The following signals are covered: Control Bus Interface I/O (CBD, CBP).  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
V
V
V
V
Input High Voltage  
Input Low Voltage  
Input Clamp Voltage  
Input Low Current  
Input High Current  
Output High Voltage  
Output Low Voltage  
TRI-STATE Leakage  
TRI-STATE Leakage  
2.0  
IH  
0.8  
V
IL  
e b  
IN  
b
1.5  
I
18 mA  
V
IC  
e
e
b
a
I
I
V
V
GND  
10  
10  
mA  
mA  
V
IL  
IH  
IN  
IN  
V
CC  
e b  
b
V
I
2 mA  
4 mA  
V
CC  
0.5  
OH  
OL  
OH  
OL  
e
V
I
0.5  
10  
V
e
e
I
I
V
V
V
mA  
mA  
OZ1  
OZ2  
OUT  
OUT  
CC  
b
V
10  
GND  
111  
7.0 Electrical Characteristics (Continued)  
DC Electrical Characteristics for All FDDI Clock Outputs  
The following signals are covered: Local Byte Clocks (LBC1LBC5), and Local Symbol Clock (LSC).  
These outputs are designed to drive capacitive loads from 20 pF to 60 pF.  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
e b  
b
2
V
V
Output High Voltage  
Output Low Voltage  
I
I
400 mA  
V
CC  
V
V
OH  
OH  
e
8 mA  
0.5  
OL  
OL  
DC Electrical Characteristics for All Clock Reference Inputs  
The following signals are covered: Reference In (REF IN) and Feedback In (FBK IN).  
Ð Ð  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
V
V
V
Input High Voltage  
Input Low Voltage  
Input Clamp Voltage  
Input Low Current  
Input High Current  
2.0  
V
V
IH  
0.8  
IL  
e b  
IN  
b
1.5  
I
18 mA  
V
IC  
e
e
b
a
I
I
V
GND  
10  
10  
mA  
mA  
IL  
IH  
IN  
IN  
V
V
CC  
DC Electrical Characteristics for Crystal Inputs and Outputs  
The following signals are covered: Crystal In (XTAL IN) and Crystal Out (XTAL OUT).  
Ð Ð  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
e
I
Output Low Current  
V
1V  
4
mA  
OL  
OUT  
(Note A)  
e
b
b
4
I
Output High Current  
Small Signal Gain  
V
V
1V  
mA  
OH  
OUT  
(Note A)  
CC  
e
XTAL IN  
Ð
100 mV  
45  
Centered about V  
(Note A)  
TH  
V
TH  
Input Threshold  
Voltage  
(Note A)  
2.2  
7.0  
V
XTAL IN to  
Ð
XTAL OUT Delay  
(Note A)  
ns  
Ð
Output Impedance  
(Note A)  
(Note A)  
270  
10  
X
Internal Resistor  
Variation  
kX  
Note A: This parameter is presented as a typical value to provide enough information to design an appropriate crystal network.  
DC Electrical Characteristics for All Open Drain Outputs  
E
E
The following signals are covered: Interrupt ( INT), Acknowledge ( ACK), and Cascade Ready (CR).  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
V
e
V
OL  
Output Low Voltage  
TRI-STATE Leakage  
I
8 mA  
0.5  
10  
OL  
e
I
V
OUT  
V
CC  
mA  
OZ  
112  
7.0 Electrical Characteristics (Continued)  
DC Electrical Characteristics for All 100K ECL Compatible Inputs  
The following signals are covered: PMD Indicate Data (PMID), Receive Clock In (RXC IN), Receive Data In (RXD IN), and  
Ð
Ð
Signal Detect (SD).  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
(Note 1)  
Min  
150  
b
Typ  
Max  
Units  
mV  
V
V
V
Input Voltage Differential  
Common Mode Voltage  
DIFF  
e
(Notes 1, 2)  
b
V
DIFF  
300 mV  
V
CC  
2.0  
V
CC  
0.5  
CM  
e
b
200  
I
Input Current  
V
IN  
V or GND  
CC  
200  
mA  
IN  
Note 1: Both inputs of each differential pair are tested together. These specifications guarantee that the inputs are compatible with standard 100K ECL voltage  
level outputs.  
Note 2: V  
is measured from the crossover point of the 300 mV differential test input.  
CM  
DC Electrical Characteristics for 100K ECL Compatible Outputs  
The following signals are covered: PMD Request Data (PMRD) and Transmit Clock (TXC).  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
e
e
b
b
b
b
b
b
V
V
Output High Voltage  
Output Low Voltage  
V
V
V
1.810  
0.880  
V
V
1.025  
1.810  
V
V
0.880  
1.620  
V
V
OH  
IL  
CC  
CC  
CC  
V
IH  
CC  
OL  
CC  
CC  
DC Electrical Characteristics for Alternate PMD ECL Outputs  
The following signals are covered: Receive Clock Out (RXC OUT) and Receive Data Out (RXD OUT).  
Ð Ð  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
e
e
b
b
b
b
b
b
V
V
Output High Voltage  
Output Low Voltage  
V
V
V
1.810  
0.880  
V
V
1.155  
1.810  
V
V
0.880  
1.550  
V
V
OH  
IL  
CC  
CC  
CC  
V
IH  
CC  
OL  
CC  
CC  
(Note 3)  
a
b
a
Note 3: It is recommended that RXC OUT and RXC OUT always be used together as a differential pair. It is recommended that RXD OUT and  
Ð Ð  
RXD OUT always be used together as a differential pair.  
Ð
b
Ð
Supply Current Electrical Characteristics  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Total Supply  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
mA  
e
e
e
I
LBC1  
LBC1  
LBC1  
12.5 MHz  
12.5 MHz  
12.5 MHz  
350*  
CC  
ECL  
I
ECL Supply Current  
200*  
20*  
mA  
CC  
Ð
ANALOG  
I
ANALOG Supply Current  
mA  
CC  
Ð
a
*Note: The PLAYER device has multiple pairs of differential ECL outputs that need to be terminated. The additional current needed for this termination is not  
a
included in the PLAYER ’s total supply current, but can be calculated as follows:  
e
e
b
b
V
V
max  
V
0.88V  
1.62V  
OH  
CC  
Ð
max  
V
OL  
Ð
CC  
b
b
2V, therefore the external load current  
Since the outputs are differential, the average output level is V  
1.25V. The test load per output is 50X at V  
CC  
CC  
through the 50X resistor is:  
e
e
e
b
0.015A  
15 mA  
b
b
2) /50  
CC  
[
]
I
(V  
1.25)  
(V  
LOAD  
CC  
As a result, the termination for each pair of active ECL outputs typically consumes 30 mA, time averaged.  
113  
7.0 Electrical Characteristics (Continued)  
7.5 AC ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS  
The AC Electrical characteristics are specified over the Recommended Operating Conditions, unless otherwise specified.  
AC Characteristics for the Control Bus Interface  
E
E
E
The following signals are covered: Control Bus Interface (R/ W, CE, INT, ACK, CBA, CBD, and CBP).  
E
Symbol  
T1  
Descriptions  
Min  
15  
Max  
Units  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
CE Setup to LBC  
LBC Period  
T2  
80  
T3  
LBC1 to ACK Low  
CE Low to ACK Low  
45  
540  
60  
T4  
290  
T5  
LBC1 Low to CBD(70) and CBP Valid  
LBC1 to CBD(70) and CBP Active  
CE Low to CBD(70) and CBP Active  
CE Low to CBD(70) and CBP Valid  
LBC Pulse Width High  
T6  
5
T7  
225  
265  
35  
475  
515  
45  
T8  
T9  
T10  
T11  
T12  
T13  
T14  
T15  
T16  
T17  
T18  
T19  
T20a  
T20b  
T20c  
T21  
T22  
LBC Pulse Width Low  
35  
45  
CE High to ACK High  
45  
R/W, CBA(50), CBD(70) and CBP Setup to CE Low  
CE High to R/W, CBA(50), CBD(70) and CBP Hold Time  
R/W, CBA(50), CBD(70) and CBP to LBC1 Setup Time  
ACK Low to CE High Lead Time  
CE Minimum Pulse Width High  
CE High to CBD(70) and CBP TRI-STATE  
ACK High to CE Low  
5
0
20  
0
20  
55  
0
CBD(70) Valid to ACK Low Setup  
LBC1 to R/W Hold Time  
20  
10  
10  
20  
LBC1 to CBA Hold Time  
LBC1 to CBD and CBP Hold Time  
LBC1 to INT Low  
55  
25  
LBC1 to EP Change  
5
Asynchronous Definitions  
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
T4 (min)  
T4 (max)  
T7 (min)  
T7 (max)  
T8 (min)  
T8 (max)  
T1  
(3 * T2)  
(6 * T2)  
(2 * T2)  
(5 * T2)  
(2 * T2)  
(5 * T2)  
T3  
T3  
T6  
T6  
T9  
T9  
T1  
T1  
T1  
T1  
T1  
a
a
T5  
T5  
e
e
e
T10 40 ns.  
Note: Min/Max numbers are based on T2  
80 ns and T9  
114  
7.0 Electrical Characteristics (Continued)  
TL/F/1170829  
FIGURE 7-1. Asynchronous Control Bus Write Cycle Timing  
TL/F/1170830  
FIGURE 7-2. Asynchronous Control Bus Read Cycle Timing  
115  
7.0 Electrical Characteristics (Continued)  
TL/F/1170831  
FIGURE 7-3. Control Bus Synchronous Writes  
TL/F/1170832  
FIGURE 7-4. Control Bus Synchronous Reads  
TL/F/1170850  
FIGURE 7-5. Control Bus Interrupt Timing  
116  
7.0 Electrical Characteristics (Continued)  
AC Characteristics for the Clock Interface Signals (Timing and Relationships)  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
5.0  
Typ  
8
Max  
11.0  
19.0  
27.0  
35.0  
Units  
ns  
e
e
e
e
T
T
T
T
LBC1LBC2 Timing  
LBC1LBC3 Timing  
LBC1LBC4 Timing  
LBC1LBC5 Timing  
PH SEL  
Ð
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
LOW  
Phase1  
Phase2  
Phase3  
Phase4  
PH SEL  
Ð
13.0  
21.0  
29.0  
16  
24  
32  
ns  
PH SEL  
Ð
ns  
PH SEL  
Ð
ns  
e
e
e
e
T
T
T
T
T
LBC1LBC2 Timing  
LBC1LBC3 Timing  
LBC1LBC4 Timing  
LBC1LBC5 Timing  
PH SEL  
Ð
HIGH  
HIGH  
HIGH  
HIGH  
45.0  
13.0  
61.0  
29.0  
5.0  
48  
16  
64  
32  
8
51.0  
19.0  
67.0  
35.0  
12.0  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Phase1  
Phase2  
Phase3  
Phase4  
Phase5  
PH SEL  
Ð
PH SEL  
Ð
PH SEL  
Ð
e
e
LBC5 Rising-  
PH SEL  
Ð
PH SEL  
LOW or  
HIGH  
LBC1 Falling Timing  
Ð
b
b
a
a
T23  
T24  
LSC Falling to LBC1  
REF IN to FBK IN  
(Note 1)  
In Lock  
3
2
6
2
ns  
ns  
Ð
Ð
Note 1: LSC loading must always be less than or equal to LBC1 loading.  
TL/F/1170833  
FIGURE 7-6. Clock Signal Relationships  
117  
7.0 Electrical Characteristics (Continued)  
TL/F/1170851  
FIGURE 7-7. Typical Clock Signal Relationships Based on Phase Select (PH SEL) Setting  
Ð
118  
7.0 Electrical Characteristics (Continued)  
AC Characteristics for the Clock Interface Signals (Periods and Pulse Widths)  
Symbol  
T2  
Parameter  
LBC Period  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
ns  
80  
T9  
LBC Pulse Width High  
LBC Pulse Width Low  
35  
35  
45  
45  
ns  
T10  
ns  
T25  
T26  
LSC Pulse Width High  
LSC Pulse Width Low  
12  
21  
19  
28  
ns  
ns  
e
e
T27  
T28  
CLK16 Period  
MODE2.CLKSEL  
0
0
64  
32  
ns  
ns  
CLK16 Pulse Width  
MODE2.CLKSEL  
(Note 1)  
27  
37  
e
e
T27  
T28  
CLK16 Period  
MODE2.CLKSEL  
1
1
32  
16  
ns  
ns  
CLK16 Pulse Width  
MODE2.CLKSEL  
(Note 1)  
11  
35  
21  
45  
T29  
REF IN Pulse Width High  
Ð
ns  
Note 1: This parameter is not tested, but is assured by correlation with characterization data.  
TL/F/1170834  
FIGURE 7-8. Clock Pulse Widths  
AC Characteristics for Port A Interface and Port B Interface  
The following signals are covered: PHY Port A (AID, AIP, AIC, ARD, ARP, ARC) and PHY Port B (BID, BIP, BIC, BRD, BRP,  
BRC).  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
T30  
LBC1 to Indicate Data Changes from  
TRI-STATE to Valid Data  
70  
ns  
T31  
LBC1 to Indicate Data Changes from  
Active to TRI-STATE  
70  
45  
ns  
T32  
T33  
T34  
T35  
LBC1 to Indicate Data Sustain  
LBC1 to Valid Indicate Data  
9
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Request Data to LBC1 Setup Time  
Request Data to LBC1 Hold Time  
15  
3
TL/F/1170835  
FIGURE 7-9. PHY Port Interface Timing  
119  
7.0 Electrical Characteristics (Continued)  
AC Characteristics for the PMD Interface  
The following signals are covered: PMD Indicate Data (PMID), Signal Detect (SD), and PMD Request Data (PMRD).  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
g
g
PMID to PMRD Latency  
T36  
Looped Back through  
Configuration Switch.  
5
LBC  
Cycles  
e
LBC1  
12.5 MHz  
In Lock  
(Note 1)  
T37  
T38  
T39  
SD Minimum Pulse Width  
PMRD Rise Time  
120  
ns  
ns  
ns  
(Note 2)  
(Note 2)  
1.5  
1.5  
PMRD Fall Time  
e
Note 1: This only applies when the Alternate PMD Interface is disabled, APMDREG.APMDEN  
Note 2: This parameter is not tested, but is assured by correlation with characterization data.  
0.  
TL/F/1170836  
FIGURE 7-10. Primary PMD Timing Diagrams  
120  
7.0 Electrical Characteristics (Continued)  
AC Characteristics for the Alternate PMD Interface  
The following input signals are covered: PMD Indicate Data (PMID), Signal Detect (SD), Receive Data In (RXD IN), Receive  
Ð
Clock In (RXC IN).  
Ð
The following output signals are covered: PMD Request Data (PMRD), Transmit Clock (TXC), Recovered Data Out  
(RXD OUT), Recovered Clock Out (RXC OUT).  
Ð Ð  
Note: The Alternate PMD Interface is only available on the 160 pin DP83257 PLAYER Device and the 100 pin DP83256-AP Device. The Transmit Clock is  
a
enabled by the CGMREG.TXCE bit. The rest of the Alternate PMD Interface is enabled by the APMDREG.APMDEN bit.  
Symbol  
T40  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
ns  
a
RXC OUT to RXD OUT Change Time  
g
1.0  
5.0  
Ð
Ð
g
PMID to RXD OUT Latency  
T41  
In Lock  
16  
ns  
Ð
a
RXD IN to RXC IN Setup Time  
g
T42  
4.0  
0.5  
4.0  
ns  
Ð
Ð
a
RXD IN to RXC IN Hold Time  
g
T43  
ns  
Ð
Ð
a
TXC to PMRD Change Time  
g
T44  
7.0  
ns  
T42  
SD Minimum Pulse Width  
120  
3.5  
ns  
g
RXC OUT Pulse Width High  
T45  
T46  
T47  
T48  
T49  
T50  
T51  
T52  
T38  
T39  
(Note 1)  
(Note 1)  
(Note 1)  
(Note 1)  
(Note 1)  
(Note 1)  
(Note 1)  
(Note 1)  
(Note 1)  
(Note 1)  
4.5  
1.5  
1.5  
1.5  
1.5  
4.5  
1.5  
1.5  
1.5  
1.5  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
ns  
Ð
g
RXC OUT Rise Time  
Ð
g
RXC OUT Fall Time  
Ð
g
RXD OUT Rise Time  
Ð
g
RXD OUT Fall Time  
Ð
g
TXC Pulse Width High  
3.5  
g
TXC Rise Time  
g
TXC Fall Time  
PMRD Rise Time  
PMRD Fall Time  
Note 1: This parameter is not tested, but is assured by correlation with characterization data.  
TL/F/1170852  
FIGURE 7-11. ECL Rise and Fall Times  
121  
7.0 Electrical Characteristics (Continued)  
TL/F/1170853  
FIGURE 7-12. Alternate PMD Timing Diagrams  
122  
7.0 Electrical Characteristics (Continued)  
AC Characteristics for the PMD Interface Inputs (ANSI Specifications)  
The following input signals are covered: PMD Indicate Data (PMID), Receive Data In (RXD IN), Receive Clock In (RXC IN).  
a
enabled by the CGMREG.TXCE bit. The rest of the Alternate PMD Interface is enabled by the APMDREG.APMDEN bit.  
Ð Ð  
Note: The Alternate PMD Interface is only available on the 160 pin DP83257 PLAYER Device and the 100 pin DP83256-AP Device. The Transmit Clock is  
All comments in square brackets are section references to the ANSI documents where these specifications can be found.  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
b
[
[
]
T53  
CRM Window Recognition Region  
(PMID Inputs)  
PMD E.2  
3
3
ns  
b
]
T54  
T55  
PMID Receive Clock Tolerance  
(Lock Acquisition Range)  
PHY 5.2.4  
100  
100  
100  
ppm  
Receive Clock Acquisition Time  
From 1st Data  
and SD Active  
ms  
[
]
PHY 5.2.6  
T56  
Receive Clock Acquisition Time  
From Line State  
Change  
15  
ms  
[
]
PHY 5.2.6  
TL/F/1170854  
TL/F/1170855  
FIGURE 7-13. Alternate PMD Input Timing DiagramsÐANSI Specifications  
123  
7.0 Electrical Characteristics (Continued)  
AC Characteristics for the PMD Interface Outputs (ANSI Specifications)  
The following output signals are covered: PMD Request Data (PMRD), Transmit Clock (TXC), Recovered Data Out  
(RXD OUT), Recovered Clock Out (RXC OUT).  
Ð Ð  
Note: The Alternate PMD Interface is only available on the 160 pin DP83257 PLAYER Device and the 100 pin DP83256-AP Device. The Transmit Clock is  
a
enabled by the CGMREG.TXCE bit. The rest of the Alternate PMD Interface is enabled by the APMDREG.APMDEN bit.  
Comments in square brackets are section references to the ANSI documents where these specifications can be found.  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
T57  
PMRD Total Transmit Jitter  
(Note 1)  
0.72  
ns p-p  
a
a
[
Duty Cycle Distortion (DCD)  
Data Dependent Jitter (DDJ)  
[
]
PMD 8.1  
]
Random Jitter (RJ)  
T58  
Total Recovered Clock (RXC OUT) Jitter  
a
(Note 1)  
2.5  
ns p-p  
Ð
Static Alignment Error Accuracy (SAE)  
[
Clock Data Dependent Jitter (C DDJ)  
[
]
PMD E.2  
a
Ð
]
Random Jitter (C RJ)  
Ð
Note 1: This parameter is not tested, but is assured through characterization data and periodic testing of sample units.  
124  
7.0 Electrical Characteristics (Continued)  
AC Characteristics for User Definable Pins  
The following signals are covered: Sense Pins (SP).  
For Enable Pins (EP) timing see AC Characteristics for the Control Bus Interface.  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
T59  
SP Minimum Pulse Width  
120  
ns  
TL/F/1170856  
FIGURE 7-14. SP Minimum Pulse Width  
AC Characteristics for Miscellaneous Interface  
E
The following signal is covered: Reset ( RST).  
Symbol  
T60  
Parameter  
Conditions  
Min  
300  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
E
Minimum Reset ( RST) Pulse Width  
ns  
ms  
ms  
T61  
Maximum Power Up Reset Cycle Duration  
(Notes 1, 2)  
10  
E
Maximum Hardware Reset ( RST) Cycle Duration  
T62  
0.5  
Note 1: This parameter is not tested, but is assured by correlation with characterization data.  
Note 2: User must wait this long before trying to access the device after power up. It is recommended that a Hardware Reset be used sometime after the Power Up  
Reset cycle is complete to insure proper device reset.  
TL/F/1170857  
FIGURE 7-15. Reset Timing  
125  
7.0 Electrical Characteristics (Continued)  
AC TEST CIRCUITS  
TL/F/1170837  
Note: S is closed for T  
1
and T  
and T  
PZL  
PLZ  
S
S
is closed for T  
2
1
PZH  
PHZ  
and S are open otherwise  
2
FIGURE 7-16. Switching Test Circuit for All TRI-STATE Output Signals  
TL/F/1170838  
FIGURE 7-17. Switching Test Circuit for All TTL Output Signals  
TL/F/1170839  
FIGURE 7-18. Switching Test Circuit for All Open Drain Output Signals (INT, ACK, and CR)  
TL/F/1170840  
FIGURE 7-19. Switching Test Circuit for All ECL Input and Output Signals  
126  
7.0 Electrical Characteristics (Continued)  
TEST WAVEFORMS  
TL/F/1170841  
FIGURE 7-20. ECL Output Test Waveform  
TL/F/1170842  
Note: All CMOS Inputs and outputs are TTL compatible.  
FIGURE 7-21. TTL Output Test Waveform  
TL/F/1170843  
FIGURE 7-22. TRI-STATE Output Test Waveform  
127  
8.0 Connection Diagrams  
8.1 DP83256VF CONNECTION DIAGRAM  
For a Pinout Summary List, refer to Table 8-1.  
TL/F/1170844  
FIGURE 8-1. DP83256VF 100-Pin JEDEC Metric PQFP Pinout  
128  
8.0 Connection Diagrams (Continued)  
TABLE 8-1. DP83256 100-Pin PQFP Pinout Summary  
Pin No.  
1
Signal Name  
Local Byte Clock 4  
Local Byte Clock 3  
Local Byte Clock 2  
Local Byte Clock 1  
Clock 16/32  
Symbol  
LBC4  
LBC3  
LBC2  
LBC1  
CLK16  
AIP  
I/O  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Pin Type  
TTL  
2
TTL  
3
TTL  
4
TTL  
5
TTL  
6
PHY Port A Indicate Parity  
PHY Port A Indicate Control  
TTL  
7
AIC  
TTL  
k
k
k
l
l
l
8
PHY Port A Indicate Data  
PHY Port A Indicate Data  
PHY Port A Indicate Data  
I/O Power  
7
6
5
AID7  
AID6  
AID5  
TTL  
9
TTL  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
TTL  
a
a
V
CC  
IO  
5V  
0V  
Ð
I/O Ground  
GND IO  
Ð
k
k
k
k
k
l
l
l
l
l
PHY Port A Indicate Data  
PHY Port A Indicate Data  
PHY Port A Indicate Data  
PHY Port A Indicate Data  
PHY Port A Indicate Data  
4
3
2
1
0
AID4  
AID3  
AID2  
AID1  
AID0  
O
O
O
O
O
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
a
a
a
Reserved  
Reserved  
0
0
RES  
RES  
0
0
0V  
0V  
5V  
0 V  
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
ANALOG Power  
ANALOG Ground  
Phase Select  
Reference Select  
Reference Input  
Feedback Input  
Crystal Output  
Crystal Input  
V
ANALOG  
CC  
Ð
a
GND ANALOG  
Ð
PH SEL  
Ð
I
I
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
REF SEL  
Ð
REF IN  
Ð
I
FBK IN  
Ð
I
XTAL OUT  
Ð
O
I
XTAL IN  
Ð
a
a
ESD Power  
V
CC  
ESD  
5V  
0V  
Ð
ESD Ground  
GND ESD  
Ð
Loop Filter  
LPFLTR  
O
a
ECL Power  
V
CC  
ECL  
5V  
Ð
b
a
b
a
PMD Request Data  
PMD Request Data  
ECL Power  
PMRD  
PMRD  
O
O
ECL  
ECL  
a
a
V
CC  
ECL  
5V  
0V  
Ð
ECL Ground  
GND ECL  
Ð
b
a
b
a
Signal Detect  
Signal Detect  
SD  
SD  
I
I
I
ECL  
ECL  
ECL  
b
b
PMID  
PMD Indicate Data  
129  
8.0 Connection Diagrams (Continued)  
TABLE 8-1. DP83256 100-Pin PQFP Pinout Summary (Continued)  
Pin No.  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
Signal Name  
Symbol  
I/O  
Pin Type  
ECL  
a
a
PMD Indicate Data  
Sense Pin 0  
Enable Pin 0  
Sense Pin 1  
Enable Pin 1  
ECL Power  
PMID  
I
I
SP0  
EP0  
SP1  
EP1  
TTL  
O
I
TTL  
TTL  
O
TTL  
a
a
V
CC  
ECL  
5V  
0V  
Ð
ECL Ground  
GND ECL  
Ð
PMD Transmitter Enable  
TXE  
TEL  
O
I
TTL  
TTL  
PMD Transmitter Enable Level  
a
Reserved  
0
RES  
0
0V  
Ð
Ð
No Connect  
N/C  
a
a
a
a
Reserved  
Ð
0
0
0
0
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
0
0
0
0
0V  
0V  
0V  
0V  
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Reserved  
Ð
Reserved  
Ð
Reserved  
Ð
No Connect  
N/C  
GND ECL  
a
a
a
a
ECL Ground  
ECL Power  
0V  
5V  
0V  
0V  
Ð
V
CC  
ECL  
Ð
Reserved  
Reserved  
0
RES  
RES  
0
Ð
Ð
Ð
0
0
Ð
k
k
k
k
k
l
l
l
l
l
PHY Port B Request Data  
PHY Port B Request Data  
PHY Port B Request Data  
PHY Port B Request Data  
PHY Port B Request Data  
I/O Ground  
0
1
2
3
4
BRD0  
BRD1  
BRD2  
BRD3  
BRD4  
I
I
I
I
I
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
a
a
GND IO  
Ð
0V  
5V  
I/O Power  
V IO  
CC  
Ð
k
k
k
l
l
l
PHY Port B Request Data  
PHY Port B Request Data  
PHY Port B Request Data  
5
6
7
BRD5  
BRD6  
BRD7  
BRC  
I
I
TTL  
TTL  
I
TTL  
PHY Port B Request Control  
PHY Port B Request Parity  
I
TTL  
BRP  
O
I
TTL  
E
E
Device Reset  
RST  
TTL  
E
Read/ Write  
E
R/  
E
E
W
I
TTL  
Chip Enable  
CE  
I
TTL  
E
Interrupt  
INT  
O
O
I
Open Drain  
Open Drain  
TTL  
E
E
ACK  
Acknowledge  
k
l
Control Bus Address  
0
CBA0  
130  
8.0 Connection Diagrams (Continued)  
TABLE 8-1. DP83256 100-Pin PQFP Pinout Summary (Continued)  
Pin No.  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
100  
Signal Name  
Control Bus Address  
I/O Logic Ground  
Symbol  
I/O  
Pin Type  
k
l
1
CBA1  
I
TTL  
a
a
GND IO  
Ð
0V  
5V  
I/O Logic Power  
V IO  
CC  
Ð
k
k
k
k
l
l
l
l
Control Bus Address  
Control Bus Address  
Control Bus Address  
Control Bus Address  
2
3
4
5
CBA2  
CBA3  
CBA4  
CBA5  
I
I
I
I
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
a
a
Reserved  
Reserved  
0
1
RES  
RES  
0
1
0V  
5V  
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
k
l
Control Bus Data  
Core Ground  
0
CBD0  
I/O  
TTL  
a
a
GND CORE  
Ð
0V  
5V  
Core Power  
V
CORE  
Ð
CC  
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Control Bus Data  
Control Bus Data  
Control Bus Data  
Control Bus Data  
Control Bus Data  
Control Bus Data  
Control Bus Data  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CBD1  
CBD2  
CBD3  
CBD4  
CBD5  
CBD6  
CBD7  
CBP  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
Control Bus Data Parity  
I/O Ground  
a
a
GND IO  
Ð
0V  
5V  
I/O Power  
V IO  
CC  
Ð
Local Symbol Clock  
Local Byte Clock5  
LSC  
O
O
TTL  
TTL  
LBC5  
131  
8.0 Connection Diagrams (Continued)  
8.2 DP83256VF-AP CONNECTION DIAGRAM  
For a Pinout Summary List, refer to Table 8-2.  
TL/F/1170858  
FIGURE 8-2. DP83256VF-AP 100-Pin JEDEC Metric PQFP Pinout  
132  
8.0 Connection Diagrams (Continued)  
TABLE 8-2. DP83256VF-AP 100-Pin PQFP Pinout Summary  
Pin No.  
1
Signal Name  
Local Byte Clock 4  
Local Byte Clock 3  
Local Byte Clock 2  
Local Byte Clock 1  
Clock 16/32  
Symbol  
LBC4  
LBC3  
LBC2  
LBC1  
CLK16  
AIP  
I/O  
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Pin Type  
TTL  
2
TTL  
3
TTL  
4
TTL  
5
TTL  
6
PHY Port A Indicate Parity  
PHY Port A Indicate Control  
TTL  
7
AIC  
TTL  
k
k
k
l
l
l
8
PHY Port A Indicate Data  
PHY Port A Indicate Data  
PHY Port A Indicate Data  
I/O Power  
7
6
5
AID7  
AID6  
AID5  
TTL  
9
TTL  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
TTL  
a
a
V
CC  
IO  
5V  
0V  
Ð
I/O Ground  
GND IO  
Ð
k
k
k
k
k
l
l
l
l
l
PHY Port A Indicate Data  
PHY Port A Indicate Data  
PHY Port A Indicate Data  
PHY Port A Indicate Data  
PHY Port A Indicate Data  
4
3
2
1
0
AID4  
AID3  
AID2  
AID1  
AID0  
O
O
O
O
O
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
a
a
a
Reserved  
Reserved  
0
0
RES  
RES  
0
0
0V  
0V  
5V  
0 V  
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
ANALOG Power  
ANALOG Ground  
Phase Select  
V
ANALOG  
CC  
Ð
a
GND ANALOG  
Ð
PH SEL  
Ð
I
I
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
Reference Select  
Reference Input  
Feedback Input  
Crystal Output  
Crystal Input  
REF SEL  
Ð
REF IN  
Ð
I
FBK IN  
Ð
I
XTAL OUT  
Ð
O
I
XTAL IN  
Ð
a
a
ESD Power  
V
CC  
ESD  
5V  
0V  
Ð
ESD Ground  
GND ESD  
Ð
b
a
b
Transmit Clock  
Transmit Clock  
ECL Power  
TXC  
TXC  
O
O
ECL  
ECL  
a
a
5V  
V
CC  
ECL  
Ð
b
a
b
a
PMD Request Data  
PMD Request Data  
PMRD  
PMRD  
O
O
O
O
ECL  
ECL  
ECL  
ECL  
b
b
a
Receive Clock Out  
Receive Clock Out  
ECL Power  
RXC OUT  
Ð
a
RXC OUT  
Ð
a
a
V
CC  
ECL  
5V  
0V  
Ð
ECL Ground  
GND ECL  
Ð
133  
8.0 Connection Diagrams (Continued)  
TABLE 8-2. DP83256VF-AP 100-Pin PQFP Pinout Summary (Continued)  
Pin No.  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
Signal Name  
Symbol  
I/O  
Pin Type  
ECL  
b
a
b
a
Signal Detect  
Signal Detect  
SD  
SD  
I
I
ECL  
b
a
b
a
PMD Indicate Data  
PMD Indicate Date  
Enable Pin 0  
PMID  
PMID  
I
ECL  
I
ECL  
EP0  
EP1  
O
O
TTL  
Enable Pin 1  
TTL  
a
a
ECL Power  
V
CC  
ECL  
5V  
0V  
Ð
ECL Ground  
GND ECL  
Ð
b
a
b
a
b
a
Receive Clock In  
Receive Clock In  
RXC IN  
Ð
I
I
ECL  
ECL  
ECL  
ECL  
ECL  
ECL  
RXC IN  
Ð
b
Receive Data In  
Receive Data In  
RXD IN  
Ð
I
a
RXD IN  
Ð
I
b
a
b
a
Receive Data Out  
Receive Data Out  
No Connect  
RXD OUT  
Ð
O
O
RXD OUT  
Ð
N/C  
N/C  
No Connect  
a
a
a
a
ECL Ground  
GND ECL  
Ð
0V  
5V  
0V  
0V  
ECL Power  
V
CC  
ECL  
Ð
Reserved  
Reserved  
0
0
RES  
RES  
0
Ð
Ð
Ð
0
Ð
k
k
k
k
k
l
l
l
l
l
PHY Port B Request Data  
PHY Port B Request Data  
PHY Port B Request Data  
PHY Port B Request Data  
PHY Port B Request Data  
I/O Ground  
0
1
2
3
4
BRD0  
BRD1  
BRD2  
BRD3  
BRD4  
I
I
I
I
I
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
a
a
GND IO  
Ð
0V  
5V  
I/O Power  
V IO  
CC  
Ð
k
k
k
l
l
l
PHY Port B Request Data  
PHY Port B Request Data  
PHY Port B Request Data  
5
6
7
BRD5  
BRD6  
BRD7  
BRC  
I
I
TTL  
TTL  
I
TTL  
PHY Port B Request Control  
PHY Port B Request Parity  
I
TTL  
BRP  
O
I
TTL  
E
E
Device Reset  
RST  
TTL  
E
Read/ Write  
E
R/  
E
E
W
I
TTL  
Chip Enable  
CE  
I
TTL  
E
Interrupt  
INT  
O
O
I
Open Drain  
Open Drain  
TTL  
E
E
ACK  
Acknowledge  
k
l
Control Bus Address  
0
CBA0  
134  
8.0 Connection Diagrams (Continued)  
TABLE 8-2. DP83256VF-AP 100-Pin PQFP Pinout Summary (Continued)  
Pin No.  
77  
78  
79  
80  
81  
82  
83  
84  
85  
86  
87  
88  
89  
90  
91  
92  
93  
94  
95  
96  
97  
98  
99  
100  
Signal Name  
Control Bus Address  
I/O Logic Ground  
Symbol  
I/O  
Pin Type  
k
l
1
CBA1  
I
TTL  
a
a
GND IO  
Ð
0V  
5V  
I/O Logic Power  
V IO  
CC  
Ð
k
k
k
k
l
l
l
l
Control Bus Address  
Control Bus Address  
Control Bus Address  
Control Bus Address  
2
3
4
5
CBA2  
CBA3  
CBA4  
CBA5  
I
I
I
I
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
a
a
Reserved  
Reserved  
0
1
RES  
RES  
0
1
0V  
5V  
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
k
l
Control Bus Data  
Core Ground  
0
CBD0  
I/O  
TTL  
a
a
GND CORE  
Ð
0V  
5V  
Core Power  
V
CORE  
Ð
CC  
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Control Bus Data  
Control Bus Data  
Control Bus Data  
Control Bus Data  
Control Bus Data  
Control Bus Data  
Control Bus Data  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CBD1  
CBD2  
CBD3  
CBD4  
CBD5  
CBD6  
CBD7  
CBP  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
Control Bus Data Parity  
I/O Ground  
a
a
GND IO  
Ð
0V  
5V  
I/O Power  
V IO  
CC  
Ð
Local Symbol Clock  
Local Byte Clock5  
LSC  
O
O
TTL  
TTL  
LBC5  
135  
8.0 Connection Diagrams (Continued)  
8.3 DP83257VF CONNECTION DIAGRAM  
For a Pinout Summary List, refer to Table 8-3.  
TL/F/1170845  
FIGURE 8-3. DP83257VF 160-Pin JEDEC Metric PQFP Pinout  
136  
8.0 Connection Diagrams (Continued)  
TABLE 8-3. DP83257 160-Pin PQFP Pinout Summary  
Pin No.  
1
Signal Name  
Local Byte Clock 4  
Symbol  
LBC4  
LBC3  
LBC2  
LBC1  
CLK16  
AIP  
I/O  
O
O
O
O
O
O
I
Pin Type  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
2
Local Byte Clock 3  
3
Local Byte Clock 2  
4
Local Byte Clock 1  
5
Clock 16/32  
6
PHY Port A Indicate Parity  
PHY Port A Request Parity  
PHY Port A Indicate Control  
PHY Port A Request Control  
7
ARP  
8
AIC  
O
I
9
ARC  
k
l
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
28  
29  
30  
31  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
38  
PHY Port A Indicate Data  
7
AID7  
ARD7  
AID6  
ARD6  
AID5  
ARD5  
O
I
k
l
PHY Port A Request Data  
7
k
l
PHY Port A Indicate Data  
6
O
I
k
l
PHY Port A Request Data  
6
k
l
PHY Port A Indicate Data  
PHY Port A Request Data  
I/O Power  
5
O
I
k
l
5
a
a
V
CC  
IO  
5V  
0V  
Ð
I/O Ground  
GND IO  
Ð
k
l
PHY Port A Indicate Data  
PHY Port A Request Data  
4
AID4  
ARD4  
AID3  
O
I
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
k
l
4
k
l
PHY Port A Indicate Data  
PHY Port A Request Data  
3
O
I
k
l
3
ARD3  
AID2  
k
l
PHY Port A Indicate Data  
PHY Port A Request Data  
2
O
I
k
l
2
ARD2  
AID1  
k
l
PHY Port A Indicate Data  
1
O
I
k
l
PHY Port A Request Data  
1
ARD1  
AID0  
k
l
PHY Port A Indicate Data  
0
O
I
k
l
PHY Port A Request Data  
0
ARD0  
a
a
a
a
a
a
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
0
0
0
0
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
0
0
0
0
0V  
0V  
0V  
0V  
5V  
0V  
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
ANALOG Power  
ANALOG Ground  
Phase Select  
V
ANALOG  
CC  
Ð
GND ANALOG  
Ð
PH SEL  
Ð
I
I
I
I
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
Reference Select  
Reference Input  
Feedback Input  
No Connect  
REF SEL  
Ð
REF IN  
Ð
FBK IN  
Ð
N/C  
137  
8.0 Connection Diagrams (Continued)  
TABLE 8-3. DP83257 160-Pin PQFP Pinout Summary (Continued)  
Pin No.  
39  
40  
41  
42  
43  
44  
45  
46  
47  
48  
49  
50  
51  
52  
53  
54  
55  
56  
57  
58  
59  
60  
61  
62  
63  
64  
65  
66  
67  
68  
69  
70  
71  
72  
73  
74  
75  
76  
Signal Name  
No Connect  
Symbol  
N/C  
I/O  
Pin Type  
No Connect  
No Connect  
No Connect  
No Connect  
No Connect  
Crystal Output  
Crystal Input  
ESD Power  
ESD Ground  
Loop Filter  
N/C  
N/C  
N/C  
N/C  
N/C  
XTAL OUT  
Ð
O
I
XTAL IN  
Ð
a
a
V
CC  
ESD  
5V  
0V  
Ð
GND ESD  
Ð
LPFLTR  
O
O
O
b
a
b
Transmit Clock  
Transmit Clock  
ECL Power  
TXC  
TXC  
ECL  
ECL  
a
a
5V  
V
CC  
ECL  
Ð
b
b
a
PMD Request Data  
PMD Request Data  
PMRD  
PMRD  
O
O
O
O
ECL  
ECL  
ECL  
ECL  
a
b
b
a
Receive Clock Out  
Receive Clock Out  
ECL Power  
RXC OUT  
Ð
a
RXC OUT  
Ð
a
a
V
CC  
ECL  
5V  
0V  
Ð
ECL Ground  
GND ECL  
Ð
b
a
b
a
Signal Detect  
Signal Detect  
SD  
SD  
I
I
ECL  
ECL  
b
a
b
a
PMD Indicate Data  
PMD Indicate Data  
Sense Pin 0  
PMID  
PMID  
I
ECL  
I
ECL  
SP0  
EP0  
SP1  
EP1  
SP2  
EP2  
CS  
I
TTL  
Enable Pin 0  
Sense Pin 1  
O
I
TTL  
TTL  
Enable Pin 1  
Sense Pin 2  
O
I
TTL  
TTL  
Enable Pin 2  
Cascade Start  
Cascade Ready  
ECL Power  
O
I
TTL  
TTL  
CR  
O
Open Drain  
a
a
V
CC  
ECL  
5V  
0V  
Ð
ECL Ground  
GND ECL  
Ð
PMD Transmitter Enable  
TXE  
TEL  
O
I
TTL  
TTL  
ECL  
ECL  
PMD Transmitter Enable Level  
b
a
b
a
Receive Clock In  
Receive Clock In  
RXC IN  
Ð
I
RXC IN  
Ð
I
138  
8.0 Connection Diagrams (Continued)  
TABLE 8-3. DP83257 160-Pin PQFP Pinout Summary (Continued)  
Pin No.  
77  
Signal Name  
Symbol  
I/O  
Pin Type  
ECL  
b
a
b
Receive Data In  
Receive Data In  
No Connect  
RXD IN  
Ð
I
I
a
78  
RXD IN  
Ð
ECL  
79  
N/C  
N/C  
N/C  
80  
No Connect  
81  
No Connect  
b
b
a
82  
Receive Data Out  
Receive Data Out  
RXD OUT  
Ð
O
O
ECL  
ECL  
a
83  
RXD OUT  
Ð
a
a
a
84  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
0
0
0
RES  
RES  
RES  
0
0
0
0V  
0V  
0V  
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
85  
86  
87  
No Connect  
N/C  
GND ECL  
a
a
a
a
a
a
88  
ECL Ground  
ECL Power  
0V  
5V  
0V  
0V  
0V  
0V  
Ð
89  
V
CC  
ECL  
Ð
90  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
0
RES  
RES  
RES  
RES  
0
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
91  
0
0
0
0
Ð
92  
0
Ð
93  
0
Ð
k
l
94  
PHY Port B Indicate Data  
PHY Port B Request Data  
0
BID0  
O
I
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
k
l
95  
0
BRD0  
BID1  
k
l
96  
PHY Port B Indicate Data  
PHY Port B Request Data  
1
O
I
k
l
97  
1
BRD1  
BID2  
k
l
98  
PHY Port B Indicate Data  
PHY Port B Request Data  
2
O
I
k
l
99  
2
BRD2  
BID3  
k
l
100  
101  
102  
103  
104  
105  
106  
107  
108  
109  
110  
111  
112  
113  
114  
PHY Port B Indicate Data  
3
O
I
k
l
PHY Port B Request Data  
3
BRD3  
BID4  
k
l
PHY Port B Indicate Data  
PHY Port B Request Data  
I/O Ground  
4
O
I
k
l
4
BRD4  
a
a
GND IO  
Ð
0V  
5V  
I/O Power  
V
IO  
CC  
Ð
k
l
PHY Port B Indicate Data  
PHY Port B Request Data  
5
BID5  
O
I
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
k
l
5
BRD5  
BID6  
BRD6  
BID7  
BRD7  
BIC  
k
l
PHY Port B Indicate Data  
PHY Port B Request Data  
6
O
I
k
l
6
k
l
PHY Port B Indicate Data  
PHY Port B Request Data  
7
O
I
k
l
7
PHY Port B Indicate Control  
O
I
PHY Port B Request Control  
PHY Port B Indicate Parity  
BRC  
BIP  
O
139  
8.0 Connection Diagrams (Continued)  
TABLE 8-3. DP83257 160-Pin PQFP Pinout Summary (Continued)  
Pin No.  
115  
116  
117  
118  
119  
120  
121  
122  
123  
124  
125  
126  
127  
128  
129  
130  
131  
132  
133  
134  
135  
136  
137  
138  
139  
140  
141  
142  
143  
144  
145  
146  
147  
148  
149  
150  
151  
Signal Name  
Symbol  
I/O  
Pin Type  
TTL  
PHY Port B Request Parity  
BRP  
I
I
E
E
Device Reset  
RST  
TTL  
E
Read/ Write  
E
R/  
E
E
W
I
TTL  
Chip Enable  
CE  
I
TTL  
E
Interrupt  
INT  
O
O
Open Drain  
Open Drain  
E
E
ACK  
Acknowledge  
No Connect  
No Connect  
No Connect  
No Connect  
No Connect  
No Connect  
No Connect  
N/C  
N/C  
N/C  
N/C  
N/C  
N/C  
N/C  
k
k
l
l
Control Bus Address  
Control Bus Address  
I/O Logic Ground  
0
1
CBA0  
CBA1  
I
I
TTL  
TTL  
a
a
GND IO  
Ð
0V  
5V  
I/O Logic Power  
V IO  
CC  
Ð
k
k
k
k
l
l
l
l
Control Bus Address  
Control Bus Address  
Control Bus Address  
Control Bus Address  
2
3
4
5
CBA2  
CBA3  
CBA4  
CBA5  
I
I
I
I
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
a
a
Reserved  
Reserved  
0
1
RES  
RES  
0
1
0V  
5V  
Ð
Ð
Ð
Ð
k
l
Control Bus Data  
Core Ground  
0
CBD0  
I/O  
TTL  
a
a
GND CORE  
Ð
0V  
5V  
Core Power  
V
CORE  
CC  
Ð
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Control Bus Data  
Control Bus Data  
Control Bus Data  
Control Bus Data  
Control Bus Data  
Control Bus Data  
Control Bus Data  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
CBD1  
CBD2  
CBD3  
CBD4  
CBD5  
CBD6  
CBD7  
CBP  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
I/O  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
TTL  
Control Bus Data Parity  
No Connect  
N/C  
No Connect  
N/C  
No Connect  
N/C  
140  
8.0 Connection Diagrams (Continued)  
TABLE 8-3. DP83257 160-Pin PQFP Pinout Summary (Continued)  
Pin No.  
152  
153  
154  
155  
156  
157  
158  
159  
160  
Signal Name  
No Connect  
Symbol  
N/C  
I/O  
Pin Type  
No Connect  
N/C  
No Connect  
N/C  
No Connect  
N/C  
No Connect  
N/C  
a
a
I/O Ground  
GND IO  
Ð
0V  
5V  
I/O Power  
V IO  
CC  
Ð
Local Symbol Clock  
Local Byte Clock5  
LSC  
O
O
TTL  
TTL  
LBC5  
141  
9.0 Package Information  
The information contained in this section describes the two packages used for the PLAYER device.  
a
a
Land pattern information is provided to assist in surface mount layout using each of the available PLAYER device packages.  
Mechanical drawings of each of the packages are also provided.  
9.1 LAND PATTERNS  
TL/F/1170846  
FIGURE 9-1. Layout Land Patterns  
TABLE 9-1. Layout Land Pattern Dimensions  
Device  
A (mm)  
B (mm)  
P (mm)  
X (mm)  
DP83256VF and DP83256VF-AP  
14mm x 14mm x 2.0mm  
14.60  
18.45  
0.50  
0.35  
100-lead JEDEC FPQFP  
DP83257VF  
28.90  
33.40  
0.65  
0.45  
28mm x 28mm x 3.42mm  
160-lead JEDEC MQFP  
9.2 MECHANICAL DRAWINGS  
a
The following two pages contain the mechanical drawings for each of the available PLAYER device packages.  
142  
Physical Dimensions millimeters  
Plastic Quad Flatpak (VJU)  
Order Number DP83256VF and DP83256VF-AP  
NS Package Number VJU100A  
143  
Physical Dimensions millimeters (Continued)  
Plastic Quad Flatpak (V)  
Order Number DP83257VF  
NS Package Number VUL160A  
LIFE SUPPORT POLICY  
NATIONAL’S PRODUCTS ARE NOT AUTHORIZED FOR USE AS CRITICAL COMPONENTS IN LIFE SUPPORT  
DEVICES OR SYSTEMS WITHOUT THE EXPRESS WRITTEN APPROVAL OF THE PRESIDENT OF NATIONAL  
SEMICONDUCTOR CORPORATION. As used herein:  
1. Life support devices or systems are devices or  
systems which, (a) are intended for surgical implant  
into the body, or (b) support or sustain life, and whose  
failure to perform, when properly used in accordance  
with instructions for use provided in the labeling, can  
be reasonably expected to result in a significant injury  
to the user.  
2. A critical component is any component of a life  
support device or system whose failure to perform can  
be reasonably expected to cause the failure of the life  
support device or system, or to affect its safety or  
effectiveness.  
National Semiconductor  
Corporation  
National Semiconductor  
Europe  
National Semiconductor  
Hong Kong Ltd.  
National Semiconductor  
Japan Ltd.  
a
1111 West Bardin Road  
Arlington, TX 76017  
Tel: 1(800) 272-9959  
Fax: 1(800) 737-7018  
Fax:  
(
49) 0-180-530 85 86  
@
13th Floor, Straight Block,  
Ocean Centre, 5 Canton Rd.  
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon  
Hong Kong  
Tel: (852) 2737-1600  
Fax: (852) 2736-9960  
Tel: 81-043-299-2309  
Fax: 81-043-299-2408  
Email: cnjwge tevm2.nsc.com  
a
a
a
a
Deutsch Tel:  
English Tel:  
Fran3ais Tel:  
Italiano Tel:  
(
(
(
(
49) 0-180-530 85 85  
49) 0-180-532 78 32  
49) 0-180-532 93 58  
49) 0-180-534 16 80  
National does not assume any responsibility for use of any circuitry described, no circuit patent licenses are implied and National reserves the right at any time without notice to change said circuitry and specifications.  

相关型号:

DP83257VF-MPC

1 CHANNEL(S), 125Mbps, FDDI CONTROLLER, PQFP16, PLASTIC, QFP-160
TI

DP83261

BMAC Device (FDDI Media Access Controller)
NSC

DP83261AVF

BMAC Device (FDDI Media Access Controller)
NSC

DP83261VF

Communications Controller
ETC

DP83265AVF

IC,COMMUNICATIONS CONTROLLER,BICMOS,QFP,160PIN
NSC

DP83265BSI

BSI⑩ Device (FDDI System Interface)
NSC

DP83265VF

IC SPECIALTY TELECOM CIRCUIT, PQFP160, PLASTIC, QFP-160, Telecom IC:Other
NSC

DP83266

MACSITM Device (FDDI Media Access Controller and System Interface)
NSC

DP83266VF

MACSITM Device (FDDI Media Access Controller and System Interface)
NSC

DP83266VF-MPC

1 CHANNEL(S), FDDI CONTROLLER, PQFP16, PLASTIC, QFP-160
TI